From 1da177e4c3f41524e886b7f1b8a0c1fc7321cac2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Linus Torvalds Date: Sat, 16 Apr 2005 15:20:36 -0700 Subject: Linux-2.6.12-rc2 Initial git repository build. I'm not bothering with the full history, even though we have it. We can create a separate "historical" git archive of that later if we want to, and in the meantime it's about 3.2GB when imported into git - space that would just make the early git days unnecessarily complicated, when we don't have a lot of good infrastructure for it. Let it rip! --- Documentation/networking/00-INDEX | 127 ++ Documentation/networking/3c359.txt | 58 + Documentation/networking/3c505.txt | 46 + Documentation/networking/3c509.txt | 210 ++ Documentation/networking/6pack.txt | 175 ++ Documentation/networking/Configurable | 34 + Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt | 204 ++ Documentation/networking/NAPI_HOWTO.txt | 766 +++++++ Documentation/networking/PLIP.txt | 215 ++ Documentation/networking/README.sb1000 | 207 ++ Documentation/networking/TODO | 18 + Documentation/networking/alias.txt | 53 + Documentation/networking/arcnet-hardware.txt | 3133 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt | 555 +++++ Documentation/networking/atm.txt | 8 + Documentation/networking/ax25.txt | 16 + Documentation/networking/baycom.txt | 158 ++ Documentation/networking/bonding.txt | 1618 +++++++++++++ Documentation/networking/bridge.txt | 8 + Documentation/networking/comx.txt | 248 ++ Documentation/networking/cops.txt | 63 + Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt | 703 ++++++ Documentation/networking/de4x5.txt | 178 ++ Documentation/networking/decnet.txt | 234 ++ Documentation/networking/depca.txt | 92 + Documentation/networking/dgrs.txt | 52 + Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt | 281 +++ Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt | 59 + Documentation/networking/driver.txt | 94 + Documentation/networking/e100.txt | 170 ++ Documentation/networking/e1000.txt | 401 ++++ Documentation/networking/eql.txt | 528 +++++ Documentation/networking/ewrk3.txt | 46 + Documentation/networking/filter.txt | 42 + Documentation/networking/fore200e.txt | 66 + Documentation/networking/framerelay.txt | 39 + Documentation/networking/gen_stats.txt | 117 + Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt | 131 ++ Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c | 1110 +++++++++ Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt | 878 ++++++++ Documentation/networking/ip_dynaddr.txt | 29 + Documentation/networking/ipddp.txt | 78 + Documentation/networking/iphase.txt | 158 ++ Documentation/networking/irda.txt | 14 + Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt | 212 ++ Documentation/networking/lapb-module.txt | 263 +++ Documentation/networking/ltpc.txt | 131 ++ Documentation/networking/multicast.txt | 64 + Documentation/networking/ncsa-telnet | 16 + Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt | 324 +++ Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt | 57 + Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt | 75 + Documentation/networking/netif-msg.txt | 79 + Documentation/networking/olympic.txt | 79 + Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt | 399 ++++ Documentation/networking/pktgen.txt | 214 ++ Documentation/networking/policy-routing.txt | 150 ++ Documentation/networking/ppp_generic.txt | 432 ++++ Documentation/networking/proc_net_tcp.txt | 47 + Documentation/networking/pt.txt | 58 + Documentation/networking/ray_cs.txt | 151 ++ Documentation/networking/routing.txt | 46 + Documentation/networking/s2io.txt | 48 + Documentation/networking/sctp.txt | 38 + Documentation/networking/shaper.txt | 48 + Documentation/networking/sis900.txt | 257 +++ Documentation/networking/sk98lin.txt | 568 +++++ Documentation/networking/skfp.txt | 220 ++ Documentation/networking/slicecom.hun | 371 +++ Documentation/networking/slicecom.txt | 369 +++ Documentation/networking/smc9.txt | 42 + Documentation/networking/smctr.txt | 66 + Documentation/networking/tcp.txt | 39 + Documentation/networking/tlan.txt | 117 + Documentation/networking/tms380tr.txt | 147 ++ Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt | 147 ++ Documentation/networking/vortex.txt | 450 ++++ Documentation/networking/wan-router.txt | 622 +++++ Documentation/networking/wanpipe.txt | 622 +++++ Documentation/networking/wavelan.txt | 73 + Documentation/networking/x25-iface.txt | 123 + Documentation/networking/x25.txt | 44 + Documentation/networking/z8530drv.txt | 657 ++++++ 83 files changed, 21285 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/00-INDEX create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/3c359.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/3c505.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/3c509.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/6pack.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/Configurable create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/NAPI_HOWTO.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/PLIP.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/README.sb1000 create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/TODO create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/alias.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/arcnet-hardware.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/atm.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/ax25.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/baycom.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/bonding.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/bridge.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/comx.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/cops.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/de4x5.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/decnet.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/depca.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/dgrs.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/driver.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/e100.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/e1000.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/eql.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/ewrk3.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/filter.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/fore200e.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/framerelay.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/gen_stats.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/ip_dynaddr.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/ipddp.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/iphase.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/irda.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/lapb-module.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/ltpc.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/multicast.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/ncsa-telnet create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/netif-msg.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/olympic.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/pktgen.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/policy-routing.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/ppp_generic.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/proc_net_tcp.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/pt.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/ray_cs.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/routing.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/s2io.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/sctp.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/shaper.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/sis900.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/sk98lin.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/skfp.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/slicecom.hun create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/slicecom.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/smc9.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/smctr.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/tcp.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/tlan.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/tms380tr.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/vortex.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/wan-router.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/wanpipe.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/wavelan.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/x25-iface.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/x25.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/z8530drv.txt (limited to 'Documentation/networking') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..834993d26730 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +00-INDEX + - this file +3c505.txt + - information on the 3Com EtherLink Plus (3c505) driver. +6pack.txt + - info on the 6pack protocol, an alternative to KISS for AX.25 +Configurable + - info on some of the configurable network parameters +DLINK.txt + - info on the D-Link DE-600/DE-620 parallel port pocket adapters +PLIP.txt + - PLIP: The Parallel Line Internet Protocol device driver +README.sb1000 + - info on General Instrument/NextLevel SURFboard1000 cable modem. +alias.txt + - info on using alias network devices +arcnet-hardware.txt + - tons of info on ARCnet, hubs, jumper settings for ARCnet cards, etc. +arcnet.txt + - info on the using the ARCnet driver itself. +atm.txt + - info on where to get ATM programs and support for Linux. +ax25.txt + - info on using AX.25 and NET/ROM code for Linux +baycom.txt + - info on the driver for Baycom style amateur radio modems +bridge.txt + - where to get user space programs for ethernet bridging with Linux. +comx.txt + - info on drivers for COMX line of synchronous serial adapters. +cops.txt + - info on the COPS LocalTalk Linux driver +cs89x0.txt + - the Crystal LAN (CS8900/20-based) Ethernet ISA adapter driver +de4x5.txt + - the Digital EtherWORKS DE4?? and DE5?? PCI Ethernet driver +decnet.txt + - info on using the DECnet networking layer in Linux. +depca.txt + - the Digital DEPCA/EtherWORKS DE1?? and DE2?? LANCE Ethernet driver +dgrs.txt + - the Digi International RightSwitch SE-X Ethernet driver +dmfe.txt + - info on the Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver. +e100.txt + - info on Intel's EtherExpress PRO/100 line of 10/100 boards +e1000.txt + - info on Intel's E1000 line of gigabit ethernet boards +eql.txt + - serial IP load balancing +ethertap.txt + - the Ethertap user space packet reception and transmission driver +ewrk3.txt + - the Digital EtherWORKS 3 DE203/4/5 Ethernet driver +filter.txt + - Linux Socket Filtering +fore200e.txt + - FORE Systems PCA-200E/SBA-200E ATM NIC driver info. +framerelay.txt + - info on using Frame Relay/Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI). +ip-sysctl.txt + - /proc/sys/net/ipv4/* variables +ip_dynaddr.txt + - IP dynamic address hack e.g. for auto-dialup links +ipddp.txt + - AppleTalk-IP Decapsulation and AppleTalk-IP Encapsulation +iphase.txt + - Interphase PCI ATM (i)Chip IA Linux driver info. +irda.txt + - where to get IrDA (infrared) utilities and info for Linux. +lapb-module.txt + - programming information of the LAPB module. +ltpc.txt + - the Apple or Farallon LocalTalk PC card driver +multicast.txt + - Behaviour of cards under Multicast +ncsa-telnet + - notes on how NCSA telnet (DOS) breaks with MTU discovery enabled. +net-modules.txt + - info and "insmod" parameters for all network driver modules. +netdevices.txt + - info on network device driver functions exported to the kernel. +olympic.txt + - IBM PCI Pit/Pit-Phy/Olympic Token Ring driver info. +policy-routing.txt + - IP policy-based routing +pt.txt + - the Gracilis Packetwin AX.25 device driver +ray_cs.txt + - Raylink Wireless LAN card driver info. +routing.txt + - the new routing mechanism +shaper.txt + - info on the module that can shape/limit transmitted traffic. +sis900.txt + - SiS 900/7016 Fast Ethernet device driver info. +sk98lin.txt + - Marvell Yukon Chipset / SysKonnect SK-98xx compliant Gigabit + Ethernet Adapter family driver info +skfp.txt + - SysKonnect FDDI (SK-5xxx, Compaq Netelligent) driver info. +smc9.txt + - the driver for SMC's 9000 series of Ethernet cards +smctr.txt + - SMC TokenCard TokenRing Linux driver info. +tcp.txt + - short blurb on how TCP output takes place. +tlan.txt + - ThunderLAN (Compaq Netelligent 10/100, Olicom OC-2xxx) driver info. +tms380tr.txt + - SysKonnect Token Ring ISA/PCI adapter driver info. +tuntap.txt + - TUN/TAP device driver, allowing user space Rx/Tx of packets. +vortex.txt + - info on using 3Com Vortex (3c590, 3c592, 3c595, 3c597) Ethernet cards. +wan-router.txt + - Wan router documentation +wanpipe.txt + - WANPIPE(tm) Multiprotocol WAN Driver for Linux WAN Router +wavelan.txt + - AT&T GIS (nee NCR) WaveLAN card: An Ethernet-like radio transceiver +x25.txt + - general info on X.25 development. +x25-iface.txt + - description of the X.25 Packet Layer to LAPB device interface. +z8530drv.txt + - info about Linux driver for Z8530 based HDLC cards for AX.25 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4af8071a6d18 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + +3COM PCI TOKEN LINK VELOCITY XL TOKEN RING CARDS README + +Release 0.9.0 - Release + Jul 17th 2000 Mike Phillips + + 1.2.0 - Final + Feb 17th 2002 Mike Phillips + Updated for submission to the 2.4.x kernel. + +Thanks: + Terry Murphy from 3Com for tech docs and support, + Adam D. Ligas for testing the driver. + +Note: + This driver will NOT work with the 3C339 Token Ring cards, you need +to use the tms380 driver instead. + +Options: + +The driver accepts three options: ringspeed, pkt_buf_sz and message_level. + +These options can be specified differently for each card found. + +ringspeed: Has one of three settings 0 (default), 4 or 16. 0 will +make the card autosense the ringspeed and join at the appropriate speed, +this will be the default option for most people. 4 or 16 allow you to +explicitly force the card to operate at a certain speed. The card will fail +if you try to insert it at the wrong speed. (Although some hubs will allow +this so be *very* careful). The main purpose for explicitly setting the ring +speed is for when the card is first on the ring. In autosense mode, if the card +cannot detect any active monitors on the ring it will open at the same speed as +its last opening. This can be hazardous if this speed does not match the speed +you want the ring to operate at. + +pkt_buf_sz: This is this initial receive buffer allocation size. This will +default to 4096 if no value is entered. You may increase performance of the +driver by setting this to a value larger than the network packet size, although +the driver now re-sizes buffers based on MTU settings as well. + +message_level: Controls level of messages created by the driver. Defaults to 0: +which only displays start-up and critical messages. Presently any non-zero +value will display all soft messages as well. NB This does not turn +debugging messages on, that must be done by modified the source code. + +Variable MTU size: + +The driver can handle a MTU size upto either 4500 or 18000 depending upon +ring speed. The driver also changes the size of the receive buffers as part +of the mtu re-sizing, so if you set mtu = 18000, you will need to be able +to allocate 16 * (sk_buff with 18000 buffer size) call it 18500 bytes per ring +position = 296,000 bytes of memory space, plus of course anything +necessary for the tx sk_buff's. Remember this is per card, so if you are +building routers, gateway's etc, you could start to use a lot of memory +real fast. + +2/17/02 Mike Phillips + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c505.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c505.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b9d5b7230118 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/3c505.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +The 3Com Etherlink Plus (3c505) driver. + +This driver now uses DMA. There is currently no support for PIO operation. +The default DMA channel is 6; this is _not_ autoprobed, so you must +make sure you configure it correctly. If loading the driver as a +module, you can do this with "modprobe 3c505 dma=n". If the driver is +linked statically into the kernel, you must either use an "ether=" +statement on the command line, or change the definition of ELP_DMA in 3c505.h. + +The driver will warn you if it has to fall back on the compiled in +default DMA channel. + +If no base address is given at boot time, the driver will autoprobe +ports 0x300, 0x280 and 0x310 (in that order). If no IRQ is given, the driver +will try to probe for it. + +The driver can be used as a loadable module. See net-modules.txt for details +of the parameters it can take. + +Theoretically, one instance of the driver can now run multiple cards, +in the standard way (when loading a module, say "modprobe 3c505 +io=0x300,0x340 irq=10,11 dma=6,7" or whatever). I have not tested +this, though. + +The driver may now support revision 2 hardware; the dependency on +being able to read the host control register has been removed. This +is also untested, since I don't have a suitable card. + +Known problems: + I still see "DMA upload timed out" messages from time to time. These +seem to be fairly non-fatal though. + The card is old and slow. + +To do: + Improve probe/setup code + Test multicast and promiscuous operation + +Authors: + The driver is mainly written by Craig Southeren, email + . + Parts of the driver (adapting the driver to 1.1.4+ kernels, + IRQ/address detection, some changes) and this README by + Juha Laiho . + DMA mode, more fixes, etc, by Philip Blundell + Multicard support, Software configurable DMA, etc., by + Christopher Collins diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..867a99f88c68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ +Linux and the 3Com EtherLink III Series Ethercards (driver v1.18c and higher) +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +This file contains the instructions and caveats for v1.18c and higher versions +of the 3c509 driver. You should not use the driver without reading this file. + +release 1.0 +28 February 2002 +Current maintainer (corrections to): + David Ruggiero + +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +(0) Introduction + +The following are notes and information on using the 3Com EtherLink III series +ethercards in Linux. These cards are commonly known by the most widely-used +card's 3Com model number, 3c509. They are all 10mb/s ISA-bus cards and shouldn't +be (but sometimes are) confused with the similarly-numbered PCI-bus "3c905" +(aka "Vortex" or "Boomerang") series. Kernel support for the 3c509 family is +provided by the module 3c509.c, which has code to support all of the following +models: + + 3c509 (original ISA card) + 3c509B (later revision of the ISA card; supports full-duplex) + 3c589 (PCMCIA) + 3c589B (later revision of the 3c589; supports full-duplex) + 3c529 (MCA) + 3c579 (EISA) + +Large portions of this documentation were heavily borrowed from the guide +written the original author of the 3c509 driver, Donald Becker. The master +copy of that document, which contains notes on older versions of the driver, +currently resides on Scyld web server: http://www.scyld.com/network/3c509.html. + + +(1) Special Driver Features + +Overriding card settings + +The driver allows boot- or load-time overriding of the card's detected IOADDR, +IRQ, and transceiver settings, although this capability shouldn't generally be +needed except to enable full-duplex mode (see below). An example of the syntax +for LILO parameters for doing this: + + ether=10,0x310,3,0x3c509,eth0 + +This configures the first found 3c509 card for IRQ 10, base I/O 0x310, and +transceiver type 3 (10base2). The flag "0x3c509" must be set to avoid conflicts +with other card types when overriding the I/O address. When the driver is +loaded as a module, only the IRQ and transceiver setting may be overridden. +For example, setting two cards to 10base2/IRQ10 and AUI/IRQ11 is done by using +the xcvr and irq module options: + + options 3c509 xcvr=3,1 irq=10,11 + + +(2) Full-duplex mode + +The v1.18c driver added support for the 3c509B's full-duplex capabilities. +In order to enable and successfully use full-duplex mode, three conditions +must be met: + +(a) You must have a Etherlink III card model whose hardware supports full- +duplex operations. Currently, the only members of the 3c509 family that are +positively known to support full-duplex are the 3c509B (ISA bus) and 3c589B +(PCMCIA) cards. Cards without the "B" model designation do *not* support +full-duplex mode; these include the original 3c509 (no "B"), the original +3c589, the 3c529 (MCA bus), and the 3c579 (EISA bus). + +(b) You must be using your card's 10baseT transceiver (i.e., the RJ-45 +connector), not its AUI (thick-net) or 10base2 (thin-net/coax) interfaces. +AUI and 10base2 network cabling is physically incapable of full-duplex +operation. + +(c) Most importantly, your 3c509B must be connected to a link partner that is +itself full-duplex capable. This is almost certainly one of two things: a full- +duplex-capable Ethernet switch (*not* a hub), or a full-duplex-capable NIC on +another system that's connected directly to the 3c509B via a crossover cable. + +/////Extremely important caution concerning full-duplex mode///// +Understand that the 3c509B's hardware's full-duplex support is much more +limited than that provide by more modern network interface cards. Although +at the physical layer of the network it fully supports full-duplex operation, +the card was designed before the current Ethernet auto-negotiation (N-way) +spec was written. This means that the 3c509B family ***cannot and will not +auto-negotiate a full-duplex connection with its link partner under any +circumstances, no matter how it is initialized***. If the full-duplex mode +of the 3c509B is enabled, its link partner will very likely need to be +independently _forced_ into full-duplex mode as well; otherwise various nasty +failures will occur - at the very least, you'll see massive numbers of packet +collisions. This is one of very rare circumstances where disabling auto- +negotiation and forcing the duplex mode of a network interface card or switch +would ever be necessary or desirable. + + +(3) Available Transceiver Types + +For versions of the driver v1.18c and above, the available transceiver types are: + +0 transceiver type from EEPROM config (normally 10baseT); force half-duplex +1 AUI (thick-net / DB15 connector) +2 (undefined) +3 10base2 (thin-net == coax / BNC connector) +4 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force half-duplex mode +8 transceiver type and duplex mode taken from card's EEPROM config settings +12 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force full-duplex mode + +Prior to driver version 1.18c, only transceiver codes 0-4 were supported. Note +that the new transceiver codes 8 and 12 are the *only* ones that will enable +full-duplex mode, no matter what the card's detected EEPROM settings might be. +This insured that merely upgrading the driver from an earlier version would +never automatically enable full-duplex mode in an existing installation; +it must always be explicitly enabled via one of these code in order to be +activated. + + +(4a) Interpretation of error messages and common problems + +Error Messages + +eth0: Infinite loop in interrupt, status 2011. +These are "mostly harmless" message indicating that the driver had too much +work during that interrupt cycle. With a status of 0x2011 you are receiving +packets faster than they can be removed from the card. This should be rare +or impossible in normal operation. Possible causes of this error report are: + + - a "green" mode enabled that slows the processor down when there is no + keyboard activitiy. + + - some other device or device driver hogging the bus or disabling interrupts. + Check /proc/interrupts for excessive interrupt counts. The timer tick + interrupt should always be incrementing faster than the others. + +No received packets +If a 3c509, 3c562 or 3c589 can successfully transmit packets, but never +receives packets (as reported by /proc/net/dev or 'ifconfig') you likely +have an interrupt line problem. Check /proc/interrupts to verify that the +card is actually generating interrupts. If the interrupt count is not +increasing you likely have a physical conflict with two devices trying to +use the same ISA IRQ line. The common conflict is with a sound card on IRQ10 +or IRQ5, and the easiest solution is to move the 3c509 to a different +interrupt line. If the device is receiving packets but 'ping' doesn't work, +you have a routing problem. + +Tx Carrier Errors Reported in /proc/net/dev +If an EtherLink III appears to transmit packets, but the "Tx carrier errors" +field in /proc/net/dev increments as quickly as the Tx packet count, you +likely have an unterminated network or the incorrect media transceiver selected. + +3c509B card is not detected on machines with an ISA PnP BIOS. +While the updated driver works with most PnP BIOS programs, it does not work +with all. This can be fixed by disabling PnP support using the 3Com-supplied +setup program. + +3c509 card is not detected on overclocked machines +Increase the delay time in id_read_eeprom() from the current value, 500, +to an absurdly high value, such as 5000. + + +(4b) Decoding Status and Error Messages + +The bits in the main status register are: + +value description +0x01 Interrupt latch +0x02 Tx overrun, or Rx underrun +0x04 Tx complete +0x08 Tx FIFO room available +0x10 A complete Rx packet has arrived +0x20 A Rx packet has started to arrive +0x40 The driver has requested an interrupt +0x80 Statistics counter nearly full + +The bits in the transmit (Tx) status word are: + +value description +0x02 Out-of-window collision. +0x04 Status stack overflow (normally impossible). +0x08 16 collisions. +0x10 Tx underrun (not enough PCI bus bandwidth). +0x20 Tx jabber. +0x40 Tx interrupt requested. +0x80 Status is valid (this should always be set). + + +When a transmit error occurs the driver produces a status message such as + + eth0: Transmit error, Tx status register 82 + +The two values typically seen here are: + +0x82 +Out of window collision. This typically occurs when some other Ethernet +host is incorrectly set to full duplex on a half duplex network. + +0x88 +16 collisions. This typically occurs when the network is exceptionally busy +or when another host doesn't correctly back off after a collision. If this +error is mixed with 0x82 errors it is the result of a host incorrectly set +to full duplex (see above). + +Both of these errors are the result of network problems that should be +corrected. They do not represent driver malfunction. + + +(5) Revision history (this file) + +28Feb02 v1.0 DR New; major portions based on Becker original 3c509 docs + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/6pack.txt b/Documentation/networking/6pack.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..48ed2b711bd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/6pack.txt @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +This is the 6pack-mini-HOWTO, written by + +Andreas Könsgen DG3KQ +Internet: ajk@iehk.rwth-aachen.de +AMPR-net: dg3kq@db0pra.ampr.org +AX.25: dg3kq@db0ach.#nrw.deu.eu + +Last update: April 7, 1998 + +1. What is 6pack, and what are the advantages to KISS? + +6pack is a transmission protocol for data exchange between the PC and +the TNC over a serial line. It can be used as an alternative to KISS. + +6pack has two major advantages: +- The PC is given full control over the radio + channel. Special control data is exchanged between the PC and the TNC so + that the PC knows at any time if the TNC is receiving data, if a TNC + buffer underrun or overrun has occurred, if the PTT is + set and so on. This control data is processed at a higher priority than + normal data, so a data stream can be interrupted at any time to issue an + important event. This helps to improve the channel access and timing + algorithms as everything is computed in the PC. It would even be possible + to experiment with something completely different from the known CSMA and + DAMA channel access methods. + This kind of real-time control is especially important to supply several + TNCs that are connected between each other and the PC by a daisy chain + (however, this feature is not supported yet by the Linux 6pack driver). + +- Each packet transferred over the serial line is supplied with a checksum, + so it is easy to detect errors due to problems on the serial line. + Received packets that are corrupt are not passed on to the AX.25 layer. + Damaged packets that the TNC has received from the PC are not transmitted. + +More details about 6pack are described in the file 6pack.ps that is located +in the doc directory of the AX.25 utilities package. + +2. Who has developed the 6pack protocol? + +The 6pack protocol has been developed by Ekki Plicht DF4OR, Henning Rech +DF9IC and Gunter Jost DK7WJ. A driver for 6pack, written by Gunter Jost and +Matthias Welwarsky DG2FEF, comes along with the PC version of FlexNet. +They have also written a firmware for TNCs to perform the 6pack +protocol (see section 4 below). + +3. Where can I get the latest version of 6pack for LinuX? + +At the moment, the 6pack stuff can obtained via anonymous ftp from +db0bm.automation.fh-aachen.de. In the directory /incoming/dg3kq, +there is a file named 6pack.tgz. + +4. Preparing the TNC for 6pack operation + +To be able to use 6pack, a special firmware for the TNC is needed. The EPROM +of a newly bought TNC does not contain 6pack, so you will have to +program an EPROM yourself. The image file for 6pack EPROMs should be +available on any packet radio box where PC/FlexNet can be found. The name of +the file is 6pack.bin. This file is copyrighted and maintained by the FlexNet +team. It can be used under the terms of the license that comes along +with PC/FlexNet. Please do not ask me about the internals of this file as I +don't know anything about it. I used a textual description of the 6pack +protocol to program the Linux driver. + +TNCs contain a 64kByte EPROM, the lower half of which is used for +the firmware/KISS. The upper half is either empty or is sometimes +programmed with software called TAPR. In the latter case, the TNC +is supplied with a DIP switch so you can easily change between the +two systems. When programming a new EPROM, one of the systems is replaced +by 6pack. It is useful to replace TAPR, as this software is rarely used +nowadays. If your TNC is not equipped with the switch mentioned above, you +can build in one yourself that switches over the highest address pin +of the EPROM between HIGH and LOW level. After having inserted the new EPROM +and switched to 6pack, apply power to the TNC for a first test. The connect +and the status LED are lit for about a second if the firmware initialises +the TNC correctly. + +5. Building and installing the 6pack driver + +The driver has been tested with kernel version 2.1.90. Use with older +kernels may lead to a compilation error because the interface to a kernel +function has been changed in the 2.1.8x kernels. + +How to turn on 6pack support: + +- In the linux kernel configuration program, select the code maturity level + options menu and turn on the prompting for development drivers. + +- Select the amateur radio support menu and turn on the serial port 6pack + driver. + +- Compile and install the kernel and the modules. + +To use the driver, the kissattach program delivered with the AX.25 utilities +has to be modified. + +- Do a cd to the directory that holds the kissattach sources. Edit the + kissattach.c file. At the top, insert the following lines: + + #ifndef N_6PACK + #define N_6PACK (N_AX25+1) + #endif + + Then find the line + + int disc = N_AX25; + + and replace N_AX25 by N_6PACK. + +- Recompile kissattach. Rename it to spattach to avoid confusions. + +Installing the driver: + +- Do an insmod 6pack. Look at your /var/log/messages file to check if the + module has printed its initialization message. + +- Do a spattach as you would launch kissattach when starting a KISS port. + Check if the kernel prints the message '6pack: TNC found'. + +- From here, everything should work as if you were setting up a KISS port. + The only difference is that the network device that represents + the 6pack port is called sp instead of sl or ax. So, sp0 would be the + first 6pack port. + +Although the driver has been tested on various platforms, I still declare it +ALPHA. BE CAREFUL! Sync your disks before insmoding the 6pack module +and spattaching. Watch out if your computer behaves strangely. Read section +6 of this file about known problems. + +Note that the connect and status LEDs of the TNC are controlled in a +different way than they are when the TNC is used with PC/FlexNet. When using +FlexNet, the connect LED is on if there is a connection; the status LED is +on if there is data in the buffer of the PC's AX.25 engine that has to be +transmitted. Under Linux, the 6pack layer is beyond the AX.25 layer, +so the 6pack driver doesn't know anything about connects or data that +has not yet been transmitted. Therefore the LEDs are controlled +as they are in KISS mode: The connect LED is turned on if data is transferred +from the PC to the TNC over the serial line, the status LED if data is +sent to the PC. + +6. Known problems + +When testing the driver with 2.0.3x kernels and +operating with data rates on the radio channel of 9600 Baud or higher, +the driver may, on certain systems, sometimes print the message '6pack: +bad checksum', which is due to data loss if the other station sends two +or more subsequent packets. I have been told that this is due to a problem +with the serial driver of 2.0.3x kernels. I don't know yet if the problem +still exists with 2.1.x kernels, as I have heard that the serial driver +code has been changed with 2.1.x. + +When shutting down the sp interface with ifconfig, the kernel crashes if +there is still an AX.25 connection left over which an IP connection was +running, even if that IP connection is already closed. The problem does not +occur when there is a bare AX.25 connection still running. I don't know if +this is a problem of the 6pack driver or something else in the kernel. + +The driver has been tested as a module, not yet as a kernel-builtin driver. + +The 6pack protocol supports daisy-chaining of TNCs in a token ring, which is +connected to one serial port of the PC. This feature is not implemented +and at least at the moment I won't be able to do it because I do not have +the opportunity to build a TNC daisy-chain and test it. + +Some of the comments in the source code are inaccurate. They are left from +the SLIP/KISS driver, from which the 6pack driver has been derived. +I haven't modified or removed them yet -- sorry! The code itself needs +some cleaning and optimizing. This will be done in a later release. + +If you encounter a bug or if you have a question or suggestion concerning the +driver, feel free to mail me, using the addresses given at the beginning of +this file. + +Have fun! + +Andreas diff --git a/Documentation/networking/Configurable b/Documentation/networking/Configurable new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..69c0dd466ead --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/Configurable @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + +There are a few network parameters that can be tuned to better match +the kernel to your system hardware and intended usage. The defaults +are usually a good choice for 99% of the people 99% of the time, but +you should be aware they do exist and can be changed. + +The current list of parameters can be found in the files: + + linux/net/TUNABLE + Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt + +Some of these are accessible via the sysctl interface, and many more are +scheduled to be added in this way. For example, some parameters related +to Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) are very easily viewed and altered. + + # cat /proc/sys/net/ipv4/arp_timeout + 6000 + # echo 7000 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/arp_timeout + # cat /proc/sys/net/ipv4/arp_timeout + 7000 + +Others are already accessible via the related user space programs. +For example, MAX_WINDOW has a default of 32 k which is a good choice for +modern hardware, but if you have a slow (8 bit) Ethernet card and/or a slow +machine, then this will be far too big for the card to keep up with fast +machines transmitting on the same net, resulting in overruns and receive errors. +A value of about 4 k would be more appropriate, which can be set via: + + # route add -net 192.168.3.0 window 4096 + +The remainder of these can only be presently changed by altering a #define +in the related header file. This means an edit and recompile cycle. + + Paul Gortmaker 06/96 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt b/Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..083d24752b83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt @@ -0,0 +1,204 @@ +Released 1994-06-13 + + + CONTENTS: + + 1. Introduction. + 2. License. + 3. Files in this release. + 4. Installation. + 5. Problems and tuning. + 6. Using the drivers with earlier releases. + 7. Acknowledgments. + + + 1. INTRODUCTION. + + This is a set of Ethernet drivers for the D-Link DE-600/DE-620 + pocket adapters, for the parallel port on a Linux based machine. + Some adapter "clones" will also work. Xircom is _not_ a clone... + These drivers _can_ be used as loadable modules, + and were developed for use on Linux 1.1.13 and above. + For use on Linux 1.0.X, or earlier releases, see below. + + I have used these drivers for NFS, ftp, telnet and X-clients on + remote machines. Transmissions with ftp seems to work as + good as can be expected (i.e. > 80k bytes/sec) from a + parallel port...:-) Receive speeds will be about 60-80% of this. + Depending on your machine, somewhat higher speeds can be achieved. + + All comments/fixes to Bjorn Ekwall (bj0rn@blox.se). + + + 2. LICENSE. + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it + and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public + License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either + version 2, or (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be + useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied + warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR + PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more + details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public + License along with this program; if not, write to the Free + Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA + 02139, USA. + + + 3. FILES IN THIS RELEASE. + + README.DLINK This file. + de600.c The Source (may it be with You :-) for the DE-600 + de620.c ditto for the DE-620 + de620.h Macros for de620.c + + If you are upgrading from the d-link tar release, there will + also be a "dlink-patches" file that will patch Linux 1.1.18: + linux/drivers/net/Makefile + linux/drivers/net/CONFIG + linux/drivers/net/MODULES + linux/drivers/net/Space.c + linux/config.in + Apply the patch by: + "cd /usr/src; patch -p0 < linux/drivers/net/dlink-patches" + The old source, "linux/drivers/net/d_link.c", can be removed. + + + 4. INSTALLATION. + + o Get the latest net binaries, according to current net.wisdom. + + o Read the NET-2 and Ethernet HOWTOs and modify your setup. + + o If your parallel port has a strange address or irq, + modify "linux/drivers/net/CONFIG" accordingly, or adjust + the parameters in the "tuning" section in the sources. + + If you are going to use the drivers as loadable modules, do _not_ + enable them while doing "make config", but instead make sure that + the drivers are included in "linux/drivers/net/MODULES". + + If you are _not_ going to use the driver(s) as loadable modules, + but instead have them included in the kernel, remember to enable + the drivers while doing "make config". + + o To include networking and DE600/DE620 support in your kernel: + # cd /linux + (as modules:) + # make config (answer yes on CONFIG_NET and CONFIG_INET) + (else included in the kernel:) + # make config (answer yes on CONFIG _NET, _INET and _DE600 or _DE620) + # make clean + # make zImage (or whatever magic you usually do) + + o I use lilo to boot multiple kernels, so that I at least + can have one working kernel :-). If you do too, append + these lines to /etc/lilo/config: + + image = /linux/zImage + label = newlinux + root = /dev/hda2 (or whatever YOU have...) + + # /etc/lilo/install + + o Do "sync" and reboot the new kernel with a D-Link + DE-600/DE-620 pocket adapter connected. + + o The adapter can be configured with ifconfig eth? + where the actual number is decided by the kernel + when the drivers are initialized. + + + 5. "PROBLEMS" AND TUNING, + + o If you see error messages from the driver, and if the traffic + stops on the adapter, try to do "ifconfig" and "route" once + more, just as in "rc.inet1". This should take care of most + problems, including effects from power loss, or adapters that + aren't connected to the printer port in some way or another. + You can somewhat change the behaviour by enabling/disabling + the macro SHUTDOWN_WHEN_LOST in the "tuning" section. + For the DE-600 there is another macro, CHECK_LOST_DE600, + that you might want to read about in the "tuning" section. + + o Some machines have trouble handling the parallel port and + the adapter at high speed. If you experience problems: + + DE-600: + - The adapter is not recognized at boot, i.e. an Ethernet + address of 00:80:c8:... is not shown, try to add another + "; SLOW_DOWN_IO" + at DE600_SLOW_DOWN in the "tuning" section. As a last resort, + uncomment: "#define REALLY_SLOW_IO" (see for hints). + + - You experience "timeout" messages: first try to add another + "; SLOW_DOWN_IO" + at DE600_SLOW_DOWN in the "tuning" section, _then_ try to + increase the value (original value: 5) at + "if (tickssofar < 5)" near line 422. + + DE-620: + - Your parallel port might be "sluggish". To cater for + this, there are the macros LOWSPEED and READ_DELAY/WRITE_DELAY + in the "tuning" section. Your first step should be to enable + LOWSPEED, and after that you can "tune" the XXX_DELAY values. + + o If the adapter _is_ recognized at boot but you get messages + about "Network Unreachable", then the problem is probably + _not_ with the driver. Check your net configuration instead + (ifconfig and route) in "rc.inet1". + + o There is some rudimentary support for debugging, look at + the source. Use "-DDE600_DEBUG=3" or "-DDE620_DEBUG=3" + when compiling, or include it in "linux/drivers/net/CONFIG". + IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS YOU CAN'T SOLVE: PLEASE COMPILE THE DRIVER + WITH DEBUGGING ENABLED, AND SEND ME THE RESULTING OUTPUT! + + + 6. USING THE DRIVERS WITH EARLIER RELEASES. + + The later 1.1.X releases of the Linux kernel include some + changes in the networking layer (a.k.a. NET3). This affects + these drivers in a few places. The hints that follow are + _not_ tested by me, since I don't have the disk space to keep + all releases on-line. + Known needed changes to date: + - release patchfile: some patches will fail, but they should + be easy to apply "by hand", since they are trivial. + (Space.c: d_link_init() is now called de600_probe()) + - de600.c: change "mark_bh(NET_BH)" to "mark_bh(INET_BH)". + - de620.c: (maybe) change the code around "netif_rx(skb);" to be + similar to the code around "dev_rint(...)" in de600.c + + + 7. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. + + These drivers wouldn't have been done without the base + (and support) from Ross Biro , + and D-Link Systems Inc. The driver relies upon GPL-ed + source from D-Link Systems Inc. and from Russel Nelson at + Crynwr Software . + + Additional input also from: + Donald Becker , Alan Cox + and Fred N. van Kempen + + DE-600 alpha release primary victim^H^H^H^H^H^Htester: + - Erik Proper . + Good input also from several users, most notably + - Mark Burton . + + DE-620 alpha release victims^H^H^H^H^H^H^Htesters: + - J. Joshua Kopper + - Olav Kvittem + - Germano Caronni + - Jeremy Fitzhardinge + + + Happy hacking! + + Bjorn Ekwall == bj0rn@blox.se diff --git a/Documentation/networking/NAPI_HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/networking/NAPI_HOWTO.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..54376e8249c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/NAPI_HOWTO.txt @@ -0,0 +1,766 @@ +HISTORY: +February 16/2002 -- revision 0.2.1: +COR typo corrected +February 10/2002 -- revision 0.2: +some spell checking ;-> +January 12/2002 -- revision 0.1 +This is still work in progress so may change. +To keep up to date please watch this space. + +Introduction to NAPI +==================== + +NAPI is a proven (www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz) technique +to improve network performance on Linux. For more details please +read that paper. +NAPI provides a "inherent mitigation" which is bound by system capacity +as can be seen from the following data collected by Robert on Gigabit +ethernet (e1000): + + Psize Ipps Tput Rxint Txint Done Ndone + --------------------------------------------------------------- + 60 890000 409362 17 27622 7 6823 + 128 758150 464364 21 9301 10 7738 + 256 445632 774646 42 15507 21 12906 + 512 232666 994445 241292 19147 241192 1062 + 1024 119061 1000003 872519 19258 872511 0 + 1440 85193 1000003 946576 19505 946569 0 + + +Legend: +"Ipps" stands for input packets per second. +"Tput" == packets out of total 1M that made it out. +"txint" == transmit completion interrupts seen +"Done" == The number of times that the poll() managed to pull all +packets out of the rx ring. Note from this that the lower the +load the more we could clean up the rxring +"Ndone" == is the converse of "Done". Note again, that the higher +the load the more times we couldnt clean up the rxring. + +Observe that: +when the NIC receives 890Kpackets/sec only 17 rx interrupts are generated. +The system cant handle the processing at 1 interrupt/packet at that load level. +At lower rates on the other hand, rx interrupts go up and therefore the +interrupt/packet ratio goes up (as observable from that table). So there is +possibility that under low enough input, you get one poll call for each +input packet caused by a single interrupt each time. And if the system +cant handle interrupt per packet ratio of 1, then it will just have to +chug along .... + + +0) Prerequisites: +================== +A driver MAY continue using the old 2.4 technique for interfacing +to the network stack and not benefit from the NAPI changes. +NAPI additions to the kernel do not break backward compatibility. +NAPI, however, requires the following features to be available: + +A) DMA ring or enough RAM to store packets in software devices. + +B) Ability to turn off interrupts or maybe events that send packets up +the stack. + +NAPI processes packet events in what is known as dev->poll() method. +Typically, only packet receive events are processed in dev->poll(). +The rest of the events MAY be processed by the regular interrupt handler +to reduce processing latency (justified also because there are not that +many of them). +Note, however, NAPI does not enforce that dev->poll() only processes +receive events. +Tests with the tulip driver indicated slightly increased latency if +all of the interrupt handler is moved to dev->poll(). Also MII handling +gets a little trickier. +The example used in this document is to move the receive processing only +to dev->poll(); this is shown with the patch for the tulip driver. +For an example of code that moves all the interrupt driver to +dev->poll() look at the ported e1000 code. + +There are caveats that might force you to go with moving everything to +dev->poll(). Different NICs work differently depending on their status/event +acknowledgement setup. +There are two types of event register ACK mechanisms. + I) what is known as Clear-on-read (COR). + when you read the status/event register, it clears everything! + The natsemi and sunbmac NICs are known to do this. + In this case your only choice is to move all to dev->poll() + + II) Clear-on-write (COW) + i) you clear the status by writing a 1 in the bit-location you want. + These are the majority of the NICs and work the best with NAPI. + Put only receive events in dev->poll(); leave the rest in + the old interrupt handler. + ii) whatever you write in the status register clears every thing ;-> + Cant seem to find any supported by Linux which do this. If + someone knows such a chip email us please. + Move all to dev->poll() + +C) Ability to detect new work correctly. +NAPI works by shutting down event interrupts when theres work and +turning them on when theres none. +New packets might show up in the small window while interrupts were being +re-enabled (refer to appendix 2). A packet might sneak in during the period +we are enabling interrupts. We only get to know about such a packet when the +next new packet arrives and generates an interrupt. +Essentially, there is a small window of opportunity for a race condition +which for clarity we'll refer to as the "rotting packet". + +This is a very important topic and appendix 2 is dedicated for more +discussion. + +Locking rules and environmental guarantees +========================================== + +-Guarantee: Only one CPU at any time can call dev->poll(); this is because +only one CPU can pick the initial interrupt and hence the initial +netif_rx_schedule(dev); +- The core layer invokes devices to send packets in a round robin format. +This implies receive is totaly lockless because of the guarantee only that +one CPU is executing it. +- contention can only be the result of some other CPU accessing the rx +ring. This happens only in close() and suspend() (when these methods +try to clean the rx ring); +****guarantee: driver authors need not worry about this; synchronization +is taken care for them by the top net layer. +-local interrupts are enabled (if you dont move all to dev->poll()). For +example link/MII and txcomplete continue functioning just same old way. +This improves the latency of processing these events. It is also assumed that +the receive interrupt is the largest cause of noise. Note this might not +always be true. +[according to Manfred Spraul, the winbond insists on sending one +txmitcomplete interrupt for each packet (although this can be mitigated)]. +For these broken drivers, move all to dev->poll(). + +For the rest of this text, we'll assume that dev->poll() only +processes receive events. + +new methods introduce by NAPI +============================= + +a) netif_rx_schedule(dev) +Called by an IRQ handler to schedule a poll for device + +b) netif_rx_schedule_prep(dev) +puts the device in a state which allows for it to be added to the +CPU polling list if it is up and running. You can look at this as +the first half of netif_rx_schedule(dev) above; the second half +being c) below. + +c) __netif_rx_schedule(dev) +Add device to the poll list for this CPU; assuming that _prep above +has already been called and returned 1. + +d) netif_rx_reschedule(dev, undo) +Called to reschedule polling for device specifically for some +deficient hardware. Read Appendix 2 for more details. + +e) netif_rx_complete(dev) + +Remove interface from the CPU poll list: it must be in the poll list +on current cpu. This primitive is called by dev->poll(), when +it completes its work. The device cannot be out of poll list at this +call, if it is then clearly it is a BUG(). You'll know ;-> + +All these above nethods are used below. So keep reading for clarity. + +Device driver changes to be made when porting NAPI +================================================== + +Below we describe what kind of changes are required for NAPI to work. + +1) introduction of dev->poll() method +===================================== + +This is the method that is invoked by the network core when it requests +for new packets from the driver. A driver is allowed to send upto +dev->quota packets by the current CPU before yielding to the network +subsystem (so other devices can also get opportunity to send to the stack). + +dev->poll() prototype looks as follows: +int my_poll(struct net_device *dev, int *budget) + +budget is the remaining number of packets the network subsystem on the +current CPU can send up the stack before yielding to other system tasks. +*Each driver is responsible for decrementing budget by the total number of +packets sent. + Total number of packets cannot exceed dev->quota. + +dev->poll() method is invoked by the top layer, the driver just sends if it +can to the stack the packet quantity requested. + +more on dev->poll() below after the interrupt changes are explained. + +2) registering dev->poll() method +=================================== + +dev->poll should be set in the dev->probe() method. +e.g: +dev->open = my_open; +. +. +/* two new additions */ +/* first register my poll method */ +dev->poll = my_poll; +/* next register my weight/quanta; can be overridden in /proc */ +dev->weight = 16; +. +. +dev->stop = my_close; + + + +3) scheduling dev->poll() +============================= +This involves modifying the interrupt handler and the code +path which takes the packet off the NIC and sends them to the +stack. + +it's important at this point to introduce the classical D Becker +interrupt processor: + +------------------ +static irqreturn_t +netdevice_interrupt(int irq, void *dev_id, struct pt_regs *regs) +{ + + struct net_device *dev = (struct net_device *)dev_instance; + struct my_private *tp = (struct my_private *)dev->priv; + + int work_count = my_work_count; + status = read_interrupt_status_reg(); + if (status == 0) + return IRQ_NONE; /* Shared IRQ: not us */ + if (status == 0xffff) + return IRQ_HANDLED; /* Hot unplug */ + if (status & error) + do_some_error_handling() + + do { + acknowledge_ints_ASAP(); + + if (status & link_interrupt) { + spin_lock(&tp->link_lock); + do_some_link_stat_stuff(); + spin_lock(&tp->link_lock); + } + + if (status & rx_interrupt) { + receive_packets(dev); + } + + if (status & rx_nobufs) { + make_rx_buffs_avail(); + } + + if (status & tx_related) { + spin_lock(&tp->lock); + tx_ring_free(dev); + if (tx_died) + restart_tx(); + spin_unlock(&tp->lock); + } + + status = read_interrupt_status_reg(); + + } while (!(status & error) || more_work_to_be_done); + return IRQ_HANDLED; +} + +---------------------------------------------------------------------- + +We now change this to what is shown below to NAPI-enable it: + +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +static irqreturn_t +netdevice_interrupt(int irq, void *dev_id, struct pt_regs *regs) +{ + struct net_device *dev = (struct net_device *)dev_instance; + struct my_private *tp = (struct my_private *)dev->priv; + + status = read_interrupt_status_reg(); + if (status == 0) + return IRQ_NONE; /* Shared IRQ: not us */ + if (status == 0xffff) + return IRQ_HANDLED; /* Hot unplug */ + if (status & error) + do_some_error_handling(); + + do { +/************************ start note *********************************/ + acknowledge_ints_ASAP(); // dont ack rx and rxnobuff here +/************************ end note *********************************/ + + if (status & link_interrupt) { + spin_lock(&tp->link_lock); + do_some_link_stat_stuff(); + spin_unlock(&tp->link_lock); + } +/************************ start note *********************************/ + if (status & rx_interrupt || (status & rx_nobuffs)) { + if (netif_rx_schedule_prep(dev)) { + + /* disable interrupts caused + * by arriving packets */ + disable_rx_and_rxnobuff_ints(); + /* tell system we have work to be done. */ + __netif_rx_schedule(dev); + } else { + printk("driver bug! interrupt while in poll\n"); + /* FIX by disabling interrupts */ + disable_rx_and_rxnobuff_ints(); + } + } +/************************ end note note *********************************/ + + if (status & tx_related) { + spin_lock(&tp->lock); + tx_ring_free(dev); + + if (tx_died) + restart_tx(); + spin_unlock(&tp->lock); + } + + status = read_interrupt_status_reg(); + +/************************ start note *********************************/ + } while (!(status & error) || more_work_to_be_done(status)); +/************************ end note note *********************************/ + return IRQ_HANDLED; +} + +--------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +We note several things from above: + +I) Any interrupt source which is caused by arriving packets is now +turned off when it occurs. Depending on the hardware, there could be +several reasons that arriving packets would cause interrupts; these are the +interrupt sources we wish to avoid. The two common ones are a) a packet +arriving (rxint) b) a packet arriving and finding no DMA buffers available +(rxnobuff) . +This means also acknowledge_ints_ASAP() will not clear the status +register for those two items above; clearing is done in the place where +proper work is done within NAPI; at the poll() and refill_rx_ring() +discussed further below. +netif_rx_schedule_prep() returns 1 if device is in running state and +gets successfully added to the core poll list. If we get a zero value +we can _almost_ assume are already added to the list (instead of not running. +Logic based on the fact that you shouldn't get interrupt if not running) +We rectify this by disabling rx and rxnobuf interrupts. + +II) that receive_packets(dev) and make_rx_buffs_avail() may have disappeared. +These functionalities are still around actually...... + +infact, receive_packets(dev) is very close to my_poll() and +make_rx_buffs_avail() is invoked from my_poll() + +4) converting receive_packets() to dev->poll() +=============================================== + +We need to convert the classical D Becker receive_packets(dev) to my_poll() + +First the typical receive_packets() below: +------------------------------------------------------------------- + +/* this is called by interrupt handler */ +static void receive_packets (struct net_device *dev) +{ + + struct my_private *tp = (struct my_private *)dev->priv; + rx_ring = tp->rx_ring; + cur_rx = tp->cur_rx; + int entry = cur_rx % RX_RING_SIZE; + int received = 0; + int rx_work_limit = tp->dirty_rx + RX_RING_SIZE - tp->cur_rx; + + while (rx_ring_not_empty) { + u32 rx_status; + unsigned int rx_size; + unsigned int pkt_size; + struct sk_buff *skb; + /* read size+status of next frame from DMA ring buffer */ + /* the number 16 and 4 are just examples */ + rx_status = le32_to_cpu (*(u32 *) (rx_ring + ring_offset)); + rx_size = rx_status >> 16; + pkt_size = rx_size - 4; + + /* process errors */ + if ((rx_size > (MAX_ETH_FRAME_SIZE+4)) || + (!(rx_status & RxStatusOK))) { + netdrv_rx_err (rx_status, dev, tp, ioaddr); + return; + } + + if (--rx_work_limit < 0) + break; + + /* grab a skb */ + skb = dev_alloc_skb (pkt_size + 2); + if (skb) { + . + . + netif_rx (skb); + . + . + } else { /* OOM */ + /*seems very driver specific ... some just pass + whatever is on the ring already. */ + } + + /* move to the next skb on the ring */ + entry = (++tp->cur_rx) % RX_RING_SIZE; + received++ ; + + } + + /* store current ring pointer state */ + tp->cur_rx = cur_rx; + + /* Refill the Rx ring buffers if they are needed */ + refill_rx_ring(); + . + . + +} +------------------------------------------------------------------- +We change it to a new one below; note the additional parameter in +the call. + +------------------------------------------------------------------- + +/* this is called by the network core */ +static int my_poll (struct net_device *dev, int *budget) +{ + + struct my_private *tp = (struct my_private *)dev->priv; + rx_ring = tp->rx_ring; + cur_rx = tp->cur_rx; + int entry = cur_rx % RX_BUF_LEN; + /* maximum packets to send to the stack */ +/************************ note note *********************************/ + int rx_work_limit = dev->quota; + +/************************ end note note *********************************/ + do { // outer beginning loop starts here + + clear_rx_status_register_bit(); + + while (rx_ring_not_empty) { + u32 rx_status; + unsigned int rx_size; + unsigned int pkt_size; + struct sk_buff *skb; + /* read size+status of next frame from DMA ring buffer */ + /* the number 16 and 4 are just examples */ + rx_status = le32_to_cpu (*(u32 *) (rx_ring + ring_offset)); + rx_size = rx_status >> 16; + pkt_size = rx_size - 4; + + /* process errors */ + if ((rx_size > (MAX_ETH_FRAME_SIZE+4)) || + (!(rx_status & RxStatusOK))) { + netdrv_rx_err (rx_status, dev, tp, ioaddr); + return 1; + } + +/************************ note note *********************************/ + if (--rx_work_limit < 0) { /* we got packets, but no quota */ + /* store current ring pointer state */ + tp->cur_rx = cur_rx; + + /* Refill the Rx ring buffers if they are needed */ + refill_rx_ring(dev); + goto not_done; + } +/********************** end note **********************************/ + + /* grab a skb */ + skb = dev_alloc_skb (pkt_size + 2); + if (skb) { + . + . +/************************ note note *********************************/ + netif_receive_skb (skb); +/********************** end note **********************************/ + . + . + } else { /* OOM */ + /*seems very driver specific ... common is just pass + whatever is on the ring already. */ + } + + /* move to the next skb on the ring */ + entry = (++tp->cur_rx) % RX_RING_SIZE; + received++ ; + + } + + /* store current ring pointer state */ + tp->cur_rx = cur_rx; + + /* Refill the Rx ring buffers if they are needed */ + refill_rx_ring(dev); + + /* no packets on ring; but new ones can arrive since we last + checked */ + status = read_interrupt_status_reg(); + if (rx status is not set) { + /* If something arrives in this narrow window, + an interrupt will be generated */ + goto done; + } + /* done! at least thats what it looks like ;-> + if new packets came in after our last check on status bits + they'll be caught by the while check and we go back and clear them + since we havent exceeded our quota */ + } while (rx_status_is_set); + +done: + +/************************ note note *********************************/ + dev->quota -= received; + *budget -= received; + + /* If RX ring is not full we are out of memory. */ + if (tp->rx_buffers[tp->dirty_rx % RX_RING_SIZE].skb == NULL) + goto oom; + + /* we are happy/done, no more packets on ring; put us back + to where we can start processing interrupts again */ + netif_rx_complete(dev); + enable_rx_and_rxnobuf_ints(); + + /* The last op happens after poll completion. Which means the following: + * 1. it can race with disabling irqs in irq handler (which are done to + * schedule polls) + * 2. it can race with dis/enabling irqs in other poll threads + * 3. if an irq raised after the begining of the outer beginning + * loop(marked in the code above), it will be immediately + * triggered here. + * + * Summarizing: the logic may results in some redundant irqs both + * due to races in masking and due to too late acking of already + * processed irqs. The good news: no events are ever lost. + */ + + return 0; /* done */ + +not_done: + if (tp->cur_rx - tp->dirty_rx > RX_RING_SIZE/2 || + tp->rx_buffers[tp->dirty_rx % RX_RING_SIZE].skb == NULL) + refill_rx_ring(dev); + + if (!received) { + printk("received==0\n"); + received = 1; + } + dev->quota -= received; + *budget -= received; + return 1; /* not_done */ + +oom: + /* Start timer, stop polling, but do not enable rx interrupts. */ + start_poll_timer(dev); + return 0; /* we'll take it from here so tell core "done"*/ + +/************************ End note note *********************************/ +} +------------------------------------------------------------------- + +From above we note that: +0) rx_work_limit = dev->quota +1) refill_rx_ring() is in charge of clearing the bit for rxnobuff when +it does the work. +2) We have a done and not_done state. +3) instead of netif_rx() we call netif_receive_skb() to pass the skb. +4) we have a new way of handling oom condition +5) A new outer for (;;) loop has been added. This serves the purpose of +ensuring that if a new packet has come in, after we are all set and done, +and we have not exceeded our quota that we continue sending packets up. + + +----------------------------------------------------------- +Poll timer code will need to do the following: + +a) + + if (tp->cur_rx - tp->dirty_rx > RX_RING_SIZE/2 || + tp->rx_buffers[tp->dirty_rx % RX_RING_SIZE].skb == NULL) + refill_rx_ring(dev); + + /* If RX ring is not full we are still out of memory. + Restart the timer again. Else we re-add ourselves + to the master poll list. + */ + + if (tp->rx_buffers[tp->dirty_rx % RX_RING_SIZE].skb == NULL) + restart_timer(); + + else netif_rx_schedule(dev); /* we are back on the poll list */ + +5) dev->close() and dev->suspend() issues +========================================== +The driver writter neednt worry about this. The top net layer takes +care of it. + +6) Adding new Stats to /proc +============================= +In order to debug some of the new features, we introduce new stats +that need to be collected. +TODO: Fill this later. + +APPENDIX 1: discussion on using ethernet HW FC +============================================== +Most chips with FC only send a pause packet when they run out of Rx buffers. +Since packets are pulled off the DMA ring by a softirq in NAPI, +if the system is slow in grabbing them and we have a high input +rate (faster than the system's capacity to remove packets), then theoretically +there will only be one rx interrupt for all packets during a given packetstorm. +Under low load, we might have a single interrupt per packet. +FC should be programmed to apply in the case when the system cant pull out +packets fast enough i.e send a pause only when you run out of rx buffers. +Note FC in itself is a good solution but we have found it to not be +much of a commodity feature (both in NICs and switches) and hence falls +under the same category as using NIC based mitigation. Also experiments +indicate that its much harder to resolve the resource allocation +issue (aka lazy receiving that NAPI offers) and hence quantify its usefullness +proved harder. In any case, FC works even better with NAPI but is not +necessary. + + +APPENDIX 2: the "rotting packet" race-window avoidance scheme +============================================================= + +There are two types of associations seen here + +1) status/int which honors level triggered IRQ + +If a status bit for receive or rxnobuff is set and the corresponding +interrupt-enable bit is not on, then no interrupts will be generated. However, +as soon as the "interrupt-enable" bit is unmasked, an immediate interrupt is +generated. [assuming the status bit was not turned off]. +Generally the concept of level triggered IRQs in association with a status and +interrupt-enable CSR register set is used to avoid the race. + +If we take the example of the tulip: +"pending work" is indicated by the status bit(CSR5 in tulip). +the corresponding interrupt bit (CSR7 in tulip) might be turned off (but +the CSR5 will continue to be turned on with new packet arrivals even if +we clear it the first time) +Very important is the fact that if we turn on the interrupt bit on when +status is set that an immediate irq is triggered. + +If we cleared the rx ring and proclaimed there was "no more work +to be done" and then went on to do a few other things; then when we enable +interrupts, there is a possibility that a new packet might sneak in during +this phase. It helps to look at the pseudo code for the tulip poll +routine: + +-------------------------- + do { + ACK; + while (ring_is_not_empty()) { + work-work-work + if quota is exceeded: exit, no touching irq status/mask + } + /* No packets, but new can arrive while we are doing this*/ + CSR5 := read + if (CSR5 is not set) { + /* If something arrives in this narrow window here, + * where the comments are ;-> irq will be generated */ + unmask irqs; + exit poll; + } + } while (rx_status_is_set); +------------------------ + +CSR5 bit of interest is only the rx status. +If you look at the last if statement: +you just finished grabbing all the packets from the rx ring .. you check if +status bit says theres more packets just in ... it says none; you then +enable rx interrupts again; if a new packet just came in during this check, +we are counting that CSR5 will be set in that small window of opportunity +and that by re-enabling interrupts, we would actually triger an interrupt +to register the new packet for processing. + +[The above description nay be very verbose, if you have better wording +that will make this more understandable, please suggest it.] + +2) non-capable hardware + +These do not generally respect level triggered IRQs. Normally, +irqs may be lost while being masked and the only way to leave poll is to do +a double check for new input after netif_rx_complete() is invoked +and re-enable polling (after seeing this new input). + +Sample code: + +--------- + . + . +restart_poll: + while (ring_is_not_empty()) { + work-work-work + if quota is exceeded: exit, not touching irq status/mask + } + . + . + . + enable_rx_interrupts() + netif_rx_complete(dev); + if (ring_has_new_packet() && netif_rx_reschedule(dev, received)) { + disable_rx_and_rxnobufs() + goto restart_poll + } while (rx_status_is_set); +--------- + +Basically netif_rx_complete() removes us from the poll list, but because a +new packet which will never be caught due to the possibility of a race +might come in, we attempt to re-add ourselves to the poll list. + + + + +APPENDIX 3: Scheduling issues. +============================== +As seen NAPI moves processing to softirq level. Linux uses the ksoftirqd as the +general solution to schedule softirq's to run before next interrupt and by putting +them under scheduler control. Also this prevents consecutive softirq's from +monopolize the CPU. This also have the effect that the priority of ksoftirq needs +to be considered when running very CPU-intensive applications and networking to +get the proper balance of softirq/user balance. Increasing ksoftirq priority to 0 +(eventually more) is reported cure problems with low network performance at high +CPU load. + +Most used processes in a GIGE router: +USER PID %CPU %MEM SIZE RSS TTY STAT START TIME COMMAND +root 3 0.2 0.0 0 0 ? RWN Aug 15 602:00 (ksoftirqd_CPU0) +root 232 0.0 7.9 41400 40884 ? S Aug 15 74:12 gated + +-------------------------------------------------------------------- + +relevant sites: +================== +ftp://robur.slu.se/pub/Linux/net-development/NAPI/ + + +-------------------------------------------------------------------- +TODO: Write net-skeleton.c driver. +------------------------------------------------------------- + +Authors: +======== +Alexey Kuznetsov +Jamal Hadi Salim +Robert Olsson + +Acknowledgements: +================ +People who made this document better: + +Lennert Buytenhek +Andrew Morton +Manfred Spraul +Donald Becker +Jeff Garzik diff --git a/Documentation/networking/PLIP.txt b/Documentation/networking/PLIP.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ad7e3f7c3bbf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/PLIP.txt @@ -0,0 +1,215 @@ +PLIP: The Parallel Line Internet Protocol Device + +Donald Becker (becker@super.org) +I.D.A. Supercomputing Research Center, Bowie MD 20715 + +At some point T. Thorn will probably contribute text, +Tommy Thorn (tthorn@daimi.aau.dk) + +PLIP Introduction +----------------- + +This document describes the parallel port packet pusher for Net/LGX. +This device interface allows a point-to-point connection between two +parallel ports to appear as a IP network interface. + +What is PLIP? +============= + +PLIP is Parallel Line IP, that is, the transportation of IP packages +over a parallel port. In the case of a PC, the obvious choice is the +printer port. PLIP is a non-standard, but [can use] uses the standard +LapLink null-printer cable [can also work in turbo mode, with a PLIP +cable]. [The protocol used to pack IP packages, is a simple one +initiated by Crynwr.] + +Advantages of PLIP +================== + +It's cheap, it's available everywhere, and it's easy. + +The PLIP cable is all that's needed to connect two Linux boxes, and it +can be built for very few bucks. + +Connecting two Linux boxes takes only a second's decision and a few +minutes' work, no need to search for a [supported] netcard. This might +even be especially important in the case of notebooks, where netcards +are not easily available. + +Not requiring a netcard also means that apart from connecting the +cables, everything else is software configuration [which in principle +could be made very easy.] + +Disadvantages of PLIP +===================== + +Doesn't work over a modem, like SLIP and PPP. Limited range, 15 m. +Can only be used to connect three (?) Linux boxes. Doesn't connect to +an existing Ethernet. Isn't standard (not even de facto standard, like +SLIP). + +Performance +=========== + +PLIP easily outperforms Ethernet cards....(ups, I was dreaming, but +it *is* getting late. EOB) + +PLIP driver details +------------------- + +The Linux PLIP driver is an implementation of the original Crynwr protocol, +that uses the parallel port subsystem of the kernel in order to properly +share parallel ports between PLIP and other services. + +IRQs and trigger timeouts +========================= + +When a parallel port used for a PLIP driver has an IRQ configured to it, the +PLIP driver is signaled whenever data is sent to it via the cable, such that +when no data is available, the driver isn't being used. + +However, on some machines it is hard, if not impossible, to configure an IRQ +to a certain parallel port, mainly because it is used by some other device. +On these machines, the PLIP driver can be used in IRQ-less mode, where +the PLIP driver would constantly poll the parallel port for data waiting, +and if such data is available, process it. This mode is less efficient than +the IRQ mode, because the driver has to check the parallel port many times +per second, even when no data at all is sent. Some rough measurements +indicate that there isn't a noticeable performance drop when using IRQ-less +mode as compared to IRQ mode as far as the data transfer speed is involved. +There is a performance drop on the machine hosting the driver. + +When the PLIP driver is used in IRQ mode, the timeout used for triggering a +data transfer (the maximal time the PLIP driver would allow the other side +before announcing a timeout, when trying to handshake a transfer of some +data) is, by default, 500usec. As IRQ delivery is more or less immediate, +this timeout is quite sufficient. + +When in IRQ-less mode, the PLIP driver polls the parallel port HZ times +per second (where HZ is typically 100 on most platforms, and 1024 on an +Alpha, as of this writing). Between two such polls, there are 10^6/HZ usecs. +On an i386, for example, 10^6/100 = 10000usec. It is easy to see that it is +quite possible for the trigger timeout to expire between two such polls, as +the timeout is only 500usec long. As a result, it is required to change the +trigger timeout on the *other* side of a PLIP connection, to about +10^6/HZ usecs. If both sides of a PLIP connection are used in IRQ-less mode, +this timeout is required on both sides. + +It appears that in practice, the trigger timeout can be shorter than in the +above calculation. It isn't an important issue, unless the wire is faulty, +in which case a long timeout would stall the machine when, for whatever +reason, bits are dropped. + +A utility that can perform this change in Linux is plipconfig, which is part +of the net-tools package (its location can be found in the +Documentation/Changes file). An example command would be +'plipconfig plipX trigger 10000', where plipX is the appropriate +PLIP device. + +PLIP hardware interconnection +----------------------------- + +PLIP uses several different data transfer methods. The first (and the +only one implemented in the early version of the code) uses a standard +printer "null" cable to transfer data four bits at a time using +data bit outputs connected to status bit inputs. + +The second data transfer method relies on both machines having +bi-directional parallel ports, rather than output-only ``printer'' +ports. This allows byte-wide transfers and avoids reconstructing +nibbles into bytes, leading to much faster transfers. + +Parallel Transfer Mode 0 Cable +============================== + +The cable for the first transfer mode is a standard +printer "null" cable which transfers data four bits at a time using +data bit outputs of the first port (machine T) connected to the +status bit inputs of the second port (machine R). There are five +status inputs, and they are used as four data inputs and a clock (data +strobe) input, arranged so that the data input bits appear as contiguous +bits with standard status register implementation. + +A cable that implements this protocol is available commercially as a +"Null Printer" or "Turbo Laplink" cable. It can be constructed with +two DB-25 male connectors symmetrically connected as follows: + + STROBE output 1* + D0->ERROR 2 - 15 15 - 2 + D1->SLCT 3 - 13 13 - 3 + D2->PAPOUT 4 - 12 12 - 4 + D3->ACK 5 - 10 10 - 5 + D4->BUSY 6 - 11 11 - 6 + D5,D6,D7 are 7*, 8*, 9* + AUTOFD output 14* + INIT output 16* + SLCTIN 17 - 17 + extra grounds are 18*,19*,20*,21*,22*,23*,24* + GROUND 25 - 25 +* Do not connect these pins on either end + +If the cable you are using has a metallic shield it should be +connected to the metallic DB-25 shell at one end only. + +Parallel Transfer Mode 1 +======================== + +The second data transfer method relies on both machines having +bi-directional parallel ports, rather than output-only ``printer'' +ports. This allows byte-wide transfers, and avoids reconstructing +nibbles into bytes. This cable should not be used on unidirectional +``printer'' (as opposed to ``parallel'') ports or when the machine +isn't configured for PLIP, as it will result in output driver +conflicts and the (unlikely) possibility of damage. + +The cable for this transfer mode should be constructed as follows: + + STROBE->BUSY 1 - 11 + D0->D0 2 - 2 + D1->D1 3 - 3 + D2->D2 4 - 4 + D3->D3 5 - 5 + D4->D4 6 - 6 + D5->D5 7 - 7 + D6->D6 8 - 8 + D7->D7 9 - 9 + INIT -> ACK 16 - 10 + AUTOFD->PAPOUT 14 - 12 + SLCT->SLCTIN 13 - 17 + GND->ERROR 18 - 15 + extra grounds are 19*,20*,21*,22*,23*,24* + GROUND 25 - 25 +* Do not connect these pins on either end + +Once again, if the cable you are using has a metallic shield it should +be connected to the metallic DB-25 shell at one end only. + +PLIP Mode 0 transfer protocol +============================= + +The PLIP driver is compatible with the "Crynwr" parallel port transfer +standard in Mode 0. That standard specifies the following protocol: + + send header nibble '0x8' + count-low octet + count-high octet + ... data octets + checksum octet + +Each octet is sent as + + >4)&0x0F)> + +To start a transfer the transmitting machine outputs a nibble 0x08. +That raises the ACK line, triggering an interrupt in the receiving +machine. The receiving machine disables interrupts and raises its own ACK +line. + +Restated: + +(OUT is bit 0-4, OUT.j is bit j from OUT. IN likewise) +Send_Byte: + OUT := low nibble, OUT.4 := 1 + WAIT FOR IN.4 = 1 + OUT := high nibble, OUT.4 := 0 + WAIT FOR IN.4 = 0 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/README.sb1000 b/Documentation/networking/README.sb1000 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f82d42584e98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/README.sb1000 @@ -0,0 +1,207 @@ +sb1000 is a module network device driver for the General Instrument (also known +as NextLevel) SURFboard1000 internal cable modem board. This is an ISA card +which is used by a number of cable TV companies to provide cable modem access. +It's a one-way downstream-only cable modem, meaning that your upstream net link +is provided by your regular phone modem. + +This driver was written by Franco Venturi . He deserves +a great deal of thanks for this wonderful piece of code! + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Support for this device is now a part of the standard Linux kernel. The +driver source code file is drivers/net/sb1000.c. In addition to this +you will need: + +1.) The "cmconfig" program. This is a utility which supplements "ifconfig" +to configure the cable modem and network interface (usually called "cm0"); +and + +2.) Several PPP scripts which live in /etc/ppp to make connecting via your +cable modem easy. + + These utilities can be obtained from: + + http://www.jacksonville.net/~fventuri/ + + in Franco's original source code distribution .tar.gz file. Support for + the sb1000 driver can be found at: + + http://home.adelphia.net/~siglercm/sb1000.html + http://linuxpower.cx/~cable/ + + along with these utilities. + +3.) The standard isapnp tools. These are necessary to configure your SB1000 +card at boot time (or afterwards by hand) since it's a PnP card. + + If you don't have these installed as a standard part of your Linux + distribution, you can find them at: + + http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/ + + or check your Linux distribution binary CD or their web site. For help with + isapnp, pnpdump, or /etc/isapnp.conf, go to: + + http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/isapnpfaq.html + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +To make the SB1000 card work, follow these steps: + +1.) Run `make config', or `make menuconfig', or `make xconfig', whichever +you prefer, in the top kernel tree directory to set up your kernel +configuration. Make sure to say "Y" to "Prompt for development drivers" +and to say "M" to the sb1000 driver. Also say "Y" or "M" to all the standard +networking questions to get TCP/IP and PPP networking support. + +2.) *BEFORE* you build the kernel, edit drivers/net/sb1000.c. Make sure +to redefine the value of READ_DATA_PORT to match the I/O address used +by isapnp to access your PnP cards. This is the value of READPORT in +/etc/isapnp.conf or given by the output of pnpdump. + +3.) Build and install the kernel and modules as usual. + +4.) Boot your new kernel following the usual procedures. + +5.) Set up to configure the new SB1000 PnP card by capturing the output +of "pnpdump" to a file and editing this file to set the correct I/O ports, +IRQ, and DMA settings for all your PnP cards. Make sure none of the settings +conflict with one another. Then test this configuration by running the +"isapnp" command with your new config file as the input. Check for +errors and fix as necessary. (As an aside, I use I/O ports 0x110 and +0x310 and IRQ 11 for my SB1000 card and these work well for me. YMMV.) +Then save the finished config file as /etc/isapnp.conf for proper configuration +on subsequent reboots. + +6.) Download the original file sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz from Franco's site or one of +the others referenced above. As root, unpack it into a temporary directory and +do a `make cmconfig' and then `install -c cmconfig /usr/local/sbin'. Don't do +`make install' because it expects to find all the utilities built and ready for +installation, not just cmconfig. + +7.) As root, copy all the files under the ppp/ subdirectory in Franco's +tar file into /etc/ppp, being careful not to overwrite any files that are +already in there. Then modify ppp@gi-on to set the correct login name, +phone number, and frequency for the cable modem. Also edit pap-secrets +to specify your login name and password and any site-specific information +you need. + +8.) Be sure to modify /etc/ppp/firewall to use ipchains instead of +the older ipfwadm commands from the 2.0.x kernels. There's a neat utility to +convert ipfwadm commands to ipchains commands: + + http://users.dhp.com/~whisper/ipfwadm2ipchains/ + +You may also wish to modify the firewall script to implement a different +firewalling scheme. + +9.) Start the PPP connection via the script /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on. You must be +root to do this. It's better to use a utility like sudo to execute +frequently used commands like this with root permissions if possible. If you +connect successfully the cable modem interface will come up and you'll see a +driver message like this at the console: + + cm0: sb1000 at (0x110,0x310), csn 1, S/N 0x2a0d16d8, IRQ 11. + sb1000.c:v1.1.2 6/01/98 (fventuri@mediaone.net) + +The "ifconfig" command should show two new interfaces, ppp0 and cm0. +The command "cmconfig cm0" will give you information about the cable modem +interface. + +10.) Try pinging a site via `ping -c 5 www.yahoo.com', for example. You should +see packets received. + +11.) If you can't get site names (like www.yahoo.com) to resolve into +IP addresses (like 204.71.200.67), be sure your /etc/resolv.conf file +has no syntax errors and has the right nameserver IP addresses in it. +If this doesn't help, try something like `ping -c 5 204.71.200.67' to +see if the networking is running but the DNS resolution is where the +problem lies. + +12.) If you still have problems, go to the support web sites mentioned above +and read the information and documentation there. + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Common problems: + +1.) Packets go out on the ppp0 interface but don't come back on the cm0 +interface. It looks like I'm connected but I can't even ping any +numerical IP addresses. (This happens predominantly on Debian systems due +to a default boot-time configuration script.) + +Solution -- As root `echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/cm0/rp_filter' so it +can share the same IP address as the ppp0 interface. Note that this +command should probably be added to the /etc/ppp/cablemodem script +*right*between* the "/sbin/ifconfig" and "/sbin/cmconfig" commands. +You may need to do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/ppp0/rp_filter as well. +If you do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/default/rp_filter on each reboot +(in rc.local or some such) then any interfaces can share the same IP +addresses. + +2.) I get "unresolved symbol" error messages on executing `insmod sb1000.o'. + +Solution -- You probably have a non-matching kernel source tree and +/usr/include/linux and /usr/include/asm header files. Make sure you +install the correct versions of the header files in these two directories. +Then rebuild and reinstall the kernel. + +3.) When isapnp runs it reports an error, and my SB1000 card isn't working. + +Solution -- There's a problem with later versions of isapnp using the "(CHECK)" +option in the lines that allocate the two I/O addresses for the SB1000 card. +This first popped up on RH 6.0. Delete "(CHECK)" for the SB1000 I/O addresses. +Make sure they don't conflict with any other pieces of hardware first! Then +rerun isapnp and go from there. + +4.) I can't execute the /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on file. + +Solution -- As root do `chmod ug+x /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on'. + +5.) The firewall script isn't working (with 2.2.x and higher kernels). + +Solution -- Use the ipfwadm2ipchains script referenced above to convert the +/etc/ppp/firewall script from the deprecated ipfwadm commands to ipchains. + +6.) I'm getting *tons* of firewall deny messages in the /var/kern.log, +/var/messages, and/or /var/syslog files, and they're filling up my /var +partition!!! + +Solution -- First, tell your ISP that you're receiving DoS (Denial of Service) +and/or portscanning (UDP connection attempts) attacks! Look over the deny +messages to figure out what the attack is and where it's coming from. Next, +edit /etc/ppp/cablemodem and make sure the ",nobroadcast" option is turned on +to the "cmconfig" command (uncomment that line). If you're not receiving these +denied packets on your broadcast interface (IP address xxx.yyy.zzz.255 +typically), then someone is attacking your machine in particular. Be careful +out there.... + +7.) Everything seems to work fine but my computer locks up after a while +(and typically during a lengthy download through the cable modem)! + +Solution -- You may need to add a short delay in the driver to 'slow down' the +SURFboard because your PC might not be able to keep up with the transfer rate +of the SB1000. To do this, it's probably best to download Franco's +sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz archive and build and install sb1000.o manually. You'll +want to edit the 'Makefile' and look for the 'SB1000_DELAY' +define. Uncomment those 'CFLAGS' lines (and comment out the default ones) +and try setting the delay to something like 60 microseconds with: +'-DSB1000_DELAY=60'. Then do `make' and as root `make install' and try +it out. If it still doesn't work or you like playing with the driver, you may +try other numbers. Remember though that the higher the delay, the slower the +driver (which slows down the rest of the PC too when it is actively +used). Thanks to Ed Daiga for this tip! + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Credits: This README came from Franco Venturi's original README file which is +still supplied with his driver .tar.gz archive. I and all other sb1000 users +owe Franco a tremendous "Thank you!" Additional thanks goes to Carl Patten +and Ralph Bonnell who are now managing the Linux SB1000 web site, and to +the SB1000 users who reported and helped debug the common problems listed +above. + + + Clemmitt Sigler + csigler@vt.edu diff --git a/Documentation/networking/TODO b/Documentation/networking/TODO new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..66d36ff14bae --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/TODO @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +To-do items for network drivers +------------------------------- + +* Move ethernet crc routine to generic code + +* (for 2.5) Integrate Jamal Hadi Salim's netdev Rx polling API change + +* Audit all net drivers to make sure magic packet / wake-on-lan / + similar features are disabled in the driver by default. + +* Audit all net drivers to make sure the module always prints out a + version string when loaded as a module, but only prints a version + string when built into the kernel if a device is detected. + +* Add ETHTOOL_GDRVINFO ioctl support to all ethernet drivers. + +* dmfe PCI DMA is totally wrong and only works on x86 + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/alias.txt b/Documentation/networking/alias.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cd12c2ff518a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/alias.txt @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + +IP-Aliasing: +============ + +IP-aliases are additional IP-addresses/masks hooked up to a base +interface by adding a colon and a string when running ifconfig. +This string is usually numeric, but this is not a must. + +IP-Aliases are avail if CONFIG_INET (`standard' IPv4 networking) +is configured in the kernel. + + +o Alias creation. + Alias creation is done by 'magic' interface naming: eg. to create a + 200.1.1.1 alias for eth0 ... + + # ifconfig eth0:0 200.1.1.1 etc,etc.... + ~~ -> request alias #0 creation (if not yet exists) for eth0 + + The corresponding route is also set up by this command. + Please note: The route always points to the base interface. + + +o Alias deletion. + The alias is removed by shutting the alias down: + + # ifconfig eth0:0 down + ~~~~~~~~~~ -> will delete alias + + +o Alias (re-)configuring + + Aliases are not real devices, but programs should be able to configure and + refer to them as usual (ifconfig, route, etc). + + +o Relationship with main device + + If the base device is shut down the added aliases will be deleted + too. + + +Contact +------- +Please finger or e-mail me: + Juan Jose Ciarlante + +Updated by Erik Schoenfelder + +; local variables: +; mode: indented-text +; mode: auto-fill +; end: diff --git a/Documentation/networking/arcnet-hardware.txt b/Documentation/networking/arcnet-hardware.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..30a5f01403d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/arcnet-hardware.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3133 @@ + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +1) This file is a supplement to arcnet.txt. Please read that for general + driver configuration help. +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +2) This file is no longer Linux-specific. It should probably be moved out of + the kernel sources. Ideas? +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Because so many people (myself included) seem to have obtained ARCnet cards +without manuals, this file contains a quick introduction to ARCnet hardware, +some cabling tips, and a listing of all jumper settings I can find. Please +e-mail apenwarr@worldvisions.ca with any settings for your particular card, +or any other information you have! + + +INTRODUCTION TO ARCNET +---------------------- + +ARCnet is a network type which works in a way similar to popular Ethernet +networks but which is also different in some very important ways. + +First of all, you can get ARCnet cards in at least two speeds: 2.5 Mbps +(slower than Ethernet) and 100 Mbps (faster than normal Ethernet). In fact, +there are others as well, but these are less common. The different hardware +types, as far as I'm aware, are not compatible and so you cannot wire a +100 Mbps card to a 2.5 Mbps card, and so on. From what I hear, my driver does +work with 100 Mbps cards, but I haven't been able to verify this myself, +since I only have the 2.5 Mbps variety. It is probably not going to saturate +your 100 Mbps card. Stop complaining. :) + +You also cannot connect an ARCnet card to any kind of Ethernet card and +expect it to work. + +There are two "types" of ARCnet - STAR topology and BUS topology. This +refers to how the cards are meant to be wired together. According to most +available documentation, you can only connect STAR cards to STAR cards and +BUS cards to BUS cards. That makes sense, right? Well, it's not quite +true; see below under "Cabling." + +Once you get past these little stumbling blocks, ARCnet is actually quite a +well-designed standard. It uses something called "modified token passing" +which makes it completely incompatible with so-called "Token Ring" cards, +but which makes transfers much more reliable than Ethernet does. In fact, +ARCnet will guarantee that a packet arrives safely at the destination, and +even if it can't possibly be delivered properly (ie. because of a cable +break, or because the destination computer does not exist) it will at least +tell the sender about it. + +Because of the carefully defined action of the "token", it will always make +a pass around the "ring" within a maximum length of time. This makes it +useful for realtime networks. + +In addition, all known ARCnet cards have an (almost) identical programming +interface. This means that with one ARCnet driver you can support any +card, whereas with Ethernet each manufacturer uses what is sometimes a +completely different programming interface, leading to a lot of different, +sometimes very similar, Ethernet drivers. Of course, always using the same +programming interface also means that when high-performance hardware +facilities like PCI bus mastering DMA appear, it's hard to take advantage of +them. Let's not go into that. + +One thing that makes ARCnet cards difficult to program for, however, is the +limit on their packet sizes; standard ARCnet can only send packets that are +up to 508 bytes in length. This is smaller than the Internet "bare minimum" +of 576 bytes, let alone the Ethernet MTU of 1500. To compensate, an extra +level of encapsulation is defined by RFC1201, which I call "packet +splitting," that allows "virtual packets" to grow as large as 64K each, +although they are generally kept down to the Ethernet-style 1500 bytes. + +For more information on the advantages and disadvantages (mostly the +advantages) of ARCnet networks, you might try the "ARCnet Trade Association" +WWW page: + http://www.arcnet.com + + +CABLING ARCNET NETWORKS +----------------------- + +This section was rewritten by + Vojtech Pavlik +using information from several people, including: + Avery Pennraun + Stephen A. Wood + John Paul Morrison + Joachim Koenig +and Avery touched it up a bit, at Vojtech's request. + +ARCnet (the classic 2.5 Mbps version) can be connected by two different +types of cabling: coax and twisted pair. The other ARCnet-type networks +(100 Mbps TCNS and 320 kbps - 32 Mbps ARCnet Plus) use different types of +cabling (Type1, Fiber, C1, C4, C5). + +For a coax network, you "should" use 93 Ohm RG-62 cable. But other cables +also work fine, because ARCnet is a very stable network. I personally use 75 +Ohm TV antenna cable. + +Cards for coax cabling are shipped in two different variants: for BUS and +STAR network topologies. They are mostly the same. The only difference +lies in the hybrid chip installed. BUS cards use high impedance output, +while STAR use low impedance. Low impedance card (STAR) is electrically +equal to a high impedance one with a terminator installed. + +Usually, the ARCnet networks are built up from STAR cards and hubs. There +are two types of hubs - active and passive. Passive hubs are small boxes +with four BNC connectors containing four 47 Ohm resistors: + + | | wires + R + junction +-R-+-R- R 47 Ohm resistors + R + | + +The shielding is connected together. Active hubs are much more complicated; +they are powered and contain electronics to amplify the signal and send it +to other segments of the net. They usually have eight connectors. Active +hubs come in two variants - dumb and smart. The dumb variant just +amplifies, but the smart one decodes to digital and encodes back all packets +coming through. This is much better if you have several hubs in the net, +since many dumb active hubs may worsen the signal quality. + +And now to the cabling. What you can connect together: + +1. A card to a card. This is the simplest way of creating a 2-computer + network. + +2. A card to a passive hub. Remember that all unused connectors on the hub + must be properly terminated with 93 Ohm (or something else if you don't + have the right ones) terminators. + (Avery's note: oops, I didn't know that. Mine (TV cable) works + anyway, though.) + +3. A card to an active hub. Here is no need to terminate the unused + connectors except some kind of aesthetic feeling. But, there may not be + more than eleven active hubs between any two computers. That of course + doesn't limit the number of active hubs on the network. + +4. An active hub to another. + +5. An active hub to passive hub. + +Remember, that you can not connect two passive hubs together. The power loss +implied by such a connection is too high for the net to operate reliably. + +An example of a typical ARCnet network: + + R S - STAR type card + S------H--------A-------S R - Terminator + | | H - Hub + | | A - Active hub + | S----H----S + S | + | + S + +The BUS topology is very similar to the one used by Ethernet. The only +difference is in cable and terminators: they should be 93 Ohm. Ethernet +uses 50 Ohm impedance. You use T connectors to put the computers on a single +line of cable, the bus. You have to put terminators at both ends of the +cable. A typical BUS ARCnet network looks like: + + RT----T------T------T------T------TR + B B B B B B + + B - BUS type card + R - Terminator + T - T connector + +But that is not all! The two types can be connected together. According to +the official documentation the only way of connecting them is using an active +hub: + + A------T------T------TR + | B B B + S---H---S + | + S + +The official docs also state that you can use STAR cards at the ends of +BUS network in place of a BUS card and a terminator: + + S------T------T------S + B B + +But, according to my own experiments, you can simply hang a BUS type card +anywhere in middle of a cable in a STAR topology network. And more - you +can use the bus card in place of any star card if you use a terminator. Then +you can build very complicated networks fulfilling all your needs! An +example: + + S + | + RT------T-------T------H------S + B B B | + | R + S------A------T-------T-------A-------H------TR + | B B | | B + | S BT | + | | | S----A-----S + S------H---A----S | | + | | S------T----H---S | + S S B R S + +A basically different cabling scheme is used with Twisted Pair cabling. Each +of the TP cards has two RJ (phone-cord style) connectors. The cards are +then daisy-chained together using a cable connecting every two neighboring +cards. The ends are terminated with RJ 93 Ohm terminators which plug into +the empty connectors of cards on the ends of the chain. An example: + + ___________ ___________ + _R_|_ _|_|_ _|_R_ + | | | | | | + |Card | |Card | |Card | + |_____| |_____| |_____| + + +There are also hubs for the TP topology. There is nothing difficult +involved in using them; you just connect a TP chain to a hub on any end or +even at both. This way you can create almost any network configuration. +The maximum of 11 hubs between any two computers on the net applies here as +well. An example: + + RP-------P--------P--------H-----P------P-----PR + | + RP-----H--------P--------H-----P------PR + | | + PR PR + + R - RJ Terminator + P - TP Card + H - TP Hub + +Like any network, ARCnet has a limited cable length. These are the maximum +cable lengths between two active ends (an active end being an active hub or +a STAR card). + + RG-62 93 Ohm up to 650 m + RG-59/U 75 Ohm up to 457 m + RG-11/U 75 Ohm up to 533 m + IBM Type 1 150 Ohm up to 200 m + IBM Type 3 100 Ohm up to 100 m + +The maximum length of all cables connected to a passive hub is limited to 65 +meters for RG-62 cabling; less for others. You can see that using passive +hubs in a large network is a bad idea. The maximum length of a single "BUS +Trunk" is about 300 meters for RG-62. The maximum distance between the two +most distant points of the net is limited to 3000 meters. The maximum length +of a TP cable between two cards/hubs is 650 meters. + + +SETTING THE JUMPERS +------------------- + +All ARCnet cards should have a total of four or five different settings: + + - the I/O address: this is the "port" your ARCnet card is on. Probed + values in the Linux ARCnet driver are only from 0x200 through 0x3F0. (If + your card has additional ones, which is possible, please tell me.) This + should not be the same as any other device on your system. According to + a doc I got from Novell, MS Windows prefers values of 0x300 or more, + eating net connections on my system (at least) otherwise. My guess is + this may be because, if your card is at 0x2E0, probing for a serial port + at 0x2E8 will reset the card and probably mess things up royally. + - Avery's favourite: 0x300. + + - the IRQ: on 8-bit cards, it might be 2 (9), 3, 4, 5, or 7. + on 16-bit cards, it might be 2 (9), 3, 4, 5, 7, or 10-15. + + Make sure this is different from any other card on your system. Note + that IRQ2 is the same as IRQ9, as far as Linux is concerned. You can + "cat /proc/interrupts" for a somewhat complete list of which ones are in + use at any given time. Here is a list of common usages from Vojtech + Pavlik : + ("Not on bus" means there is no way for a card to generate this + interrupt) + IRQ 0 - Timer 0 (Not on bus) + IRQ 1 - Keyboard (Not on bus) + IRQ 2 - IRQ Controller 2 (Not on bus, nor does interrupt the CPU) + IRQ 3 - COM2 + IRQ 4 - COM1 + IRQ 5 - FREE (LPT2 if you have it; sometimes COM3; maybe PLIP) + IRQ 6 - Floppy disk controller + IRQ 7 - FREE (LPT1 if you don't use the polling driver; PLIP) + IRQ 8 - Realtime Clock Interrupt (Not on bus) + IRQ 9 - FREE (VGA vertical sync interrupt if enabled) + IRQ 10 - FREE + IRQ 11 - FREE + IRQ 12 - FREE + IRQ 13 - Numeric Coprocessor (Not on bus) + IRQ 14 - Fixed Disk Controller + IRQ 15 - FREE (Fixed Disk Controller 2 if you have it) + + Note: IRQ 9 is used on some video cards for the "vertical retrace" + interrupt. This interrupt would have been handy for things like + video games, as it occurs exactly once per screen refresh, but + unfortunately IBM cancelled this feature starting with the original + VGA and thus many VGA/SVGA cards do not support it. For this + reason, no modern software uses this interrupt and it can almost + always be safely disabled, if your video card supports it at all. + + If your card for some reason CANNOT disable this IRQ (usually there + is a jumper), one solution would be to clip the printed circuit + contact on the board: it's the fourth contact from the left on the + back side. I take no responsibility if you try this. + + - Avery's favourite: IRQ2 (actually IRQ9). Watch that VGA, though. + + - the memory address: Unlike most cards, ARCnets use "shared memory" for + copying buffers around. Make SURE it doesn't conflict with any other + used memory in your system! + A0000 - VGA graphics memory (ok if you don't have VGA) + B0000 - Monochrome text mode + C0000 \ One of these is your VGA BIOS - usually C0000. + E0000 / + F0000 - System BIOS + + Anything less than 0xA0000 is, well, a BAD idea since it isn't above + 640k. + - Avery's favourite: 0xD0000 + + - the station address: Every ARCnet card has its own "unique" network + address from 0 to 255. Unlike Ethernet, you can set this address + yourself with a jumper or switch (or on some cards, with special + software). Since it's only 8 bits, you can only have 254 ARCnet cards + on a network. DON'T use 0 or 255, since these are reserved (although + neat stuff will probably happen if you DO use them). By the way, if you + haven't already guessed, don't set this the same as any other ARCnet on + your network! + - Avery's favourite: 3 and 4. Not that it matters. + + - There may be ETS1 and ETS2 settings. These may or may not make a + difference on your card (many manuals call them "reserved"), but are + used to change the delays used when powering up a computer on the + network. This is only necessary when wiring VERY long range ARCnet + networks, on the order of 4km or so; in any case, the only real + requirement here is that all cards on the network with ETS1 and ETS2 + jumpers have them in the same position. Chris Hindy + sent in a chart with actual values for this: + ET1 ET2 Response Time Reconfiguration Time + --- --- ------------- -------------------- + open open 74.7us 840us + open closed 283.4us 1680us + closed open 561.8us 1680us + closed closed 1118.6us 1680us + + Make sure you set ETS1 and ETS2 to the SAME VALUE for all cards on your + network. + +Also, on many cards (not mine, though) there are red and green LED's. +Vojtech Pavlik tells me this is what they mean: + GREEN RED Status + ----- --- ------ + OFF OFF Power off + OFF Short flashes Cabling problems (broken cable or not + terminated) + OFF (short) ON Card init + ON ON Normal state - everything OK, nothing + happens + ON Long flashes Data transfer + ON OFF Never happens (maybe when wrong ID) + + +The following is all the specific information people have sent me about +their own particular ARCnet cards. It is officially a mess, and contains +huge amounts of duplicated information. I have no time to fix it. If you +want to, PLEASE DO! Just send me a 'diff -u' of all your changes. + +The model # is listed right above specifics for that card, so you should be +able to use your text viewer's "search" function to find the entry you want. +If you don't KNOW what kind of card you have, try looking through the +various diagrams to see if you can tell. + +If your model isn't listed and/or has different settings, PLEASE PLEASE +tell me. I had to figure mine out without the manual, and it WASN'T FUN! + +Even if your ARCnet model isn't listed, but has the same jumpers as another +model that is, please e-mail me to say so. + +Cards Listed in this file (in this order, mostly): + + Manufacturer Model # Bits + ------------ ------- ---- + SMC PC100 8 + SMC PC110 8 + SMC PC120 8 + SMC PC130 8 + SMC PC270E 8 + SMC PC500 16 + SMC PC500Longboard 16 + SMC PC550Longboard 16 + SMC PC600 16 + SMC PC710 8 + SMC? LCS-8830(-T) 8/16 + Puredata PDI507 8 + CNet Tech CN120-Series 8 + CNet Tech CN160-Series 16 + Lantech? UM9065L chipset 8 + Acer 5210-003 8 + Datapoint? LAN-ARC-8 8 + Topware TA-ARC/10 8 + Thomas-Conrad 500-6242-0097 REV A 8 + Waterloo? (C)1985 Waterloo Micro. 8 + No Name -- 8/16 + No Name Taiwan R.O.C? 8 + No Name Model 9058 8 + Tiara Tiara Lancard? 8 + + +** SMC = Standard Microsystems Corp. +** CNet Tech = CNet Technology, Inc. + + +Unclassified Stuff +------------------ + - Please send any other information you can find. + + - And some other stuff (more info is welcome!): + From: root@ultraworld.xs4all.nl (Timo Hilbrink) + To: apenwarr@foxnet.net (Avery Pennarun) + Date: Wed, 26 Oct 1994 02:10:32 +0000 (GMT) + Reply-To: timoh@xs4all.nl + + [...parts deleted...] + + About the jumpers: On my PC130 there is one more jumper, located near the + cable-connector and it's for changing to star or bus topology; + closed: star - open: bus + On the PC500 are some more jumper-pins, one block labeled with RX,PDN,TXI + and another with ALE,LA17,LA18,LA19 these are undocumented.. + + [...more parts deleted...] + + --- CUT --- + + +** Standard Microsystems Corp (SMC) ** +PC100, PC110, PC120, PC130 (8-bit cards) +PC500, PC600 (16-bit cards) +--------------------------------- + - mainly from Avery Pennarun . Values depicted + are from Avery's setup. + - special thanks to Timo Hilbrink for noting that PC120, + 130, 500, and 600 all have the same switches as Avery's PC100. + PC500/600 have several extra, undocumented pins though. (?) + - PC110 settings were verified by Stephen A. Wood + - Also, the JP- and S-numbers probably don't match your card exactly. Try + to find jumpers/switches with the same number of settings - it's + probably more reliable. + + + JP5 [|] : : : : +(IRQ Setting) IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ7 + Put exactly one jumper on exactly one set of pins. + + + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 + S1 /----------------------------------\ +(I/O and Memory | 1 1 * 0 0 0 0 * 1 1 0 1 | + addresses) \----------------------------------/ + |--| |--------| |--------| + (a) (b) (m) + + WARNING. It's very important when setting these which way + you're holding the card, and which way you think is '1'! + + If you suspect that your settings are not being made + correctly, try reversing the direction or inverting the + switch positions. + + a: The first digit of the I/O address. + Setting Value + ------- ----- + 00 0 + 01 1 + 10 2 + 11 3 + + b: The second digit of the I/O address. + Setting Value + ------- ----- + 0000 0 + 0001 1 + 0010 2 + ... ... + 1110 E + 1111 F + + The I/O address is in the form ab0. For example, if + a is 0x2 and b is 0xE, the address will be 0x2E0. + + DO NOT SET THIS LESS THAN 0x200!!!!! + + + m: The first digit of the memory address. + Setting Value + ------- ----- + 0000 0 + 0001 1 + 0010 2 + ... ... + 1110 E + 1111 F + + The memory address is in the form m0000. For example, if + m is D, the address will be 0xD0000. + + DO NOT SET THIS TO C0000, F0000, OR LESS THAN A0000! + + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 + S2 /--------------------------\ +(Station Address) | 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 | + \--------------------------/ + + Setting Value + ------- ----- + 00000000 00 + 10000000 01 + 01000000 02 + ... + 01111111 FE + 11111111 FF + + Note that this is binary with the digits reversed! + + DO NOT SET THIS TO 0 OR 255 (0xFF)! + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Standard Microsystems Corp (SMC) ** +PC130E/PC270E (8-bit cards) +--------------------------- + - from Juergen Seifert + + +STANDARD MICROSYSTEMS CORPORATION (SMC) ARCNET(R)-PC130E/PC270E +=============================================================== + +This description has been written by Juergen Seifert +using information from the following Original SMC Manual + + "Configuration Guide for + ARCNET(R)-PC130E/PC270 + Network Controller Boards + Pub. # 900.044A + June, 1989" + +ARCNET is a registered trademark of the Datapoint Corporation +SMC is a registered trademark of the Standard Microsystems Corporation + +The PC130E is an enhanced version of the PC130 board, is equipped with a +standard BNC female connector for connection to RG-62/U coax cable. +Since this board is designed both for point-to-point connection in star +networks and for connection to bus networks, it is downwardly compatible +with all the other standard boards designed for coax networks (that is, +the PC120, PC110 and PC100 star topology boards and the PC220, PC210 and +PC200 bus topology boards). + +The PC270E is an enhanced version of the PC260 board, is equipped with two +modular RJ11-type jacks for connection to twisted pair wiring. +It can be used in a star or a daisy-chained network. + + + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 + ________________________________________________________________ + | | S1 | | + | |_________________| | + | Offs|Base |I/O Addr | + | RAM Addr | ___| + | ___ ___ CR3 |___| + | | \/ | CR4 |___| + | | PROM | ___| + | | | N | | 8 + | | SOCKET | o | | 7 + | |________| d | | 6 + | ___________________ e | | 5 + | | | A | S | 4 + | |oo| EXT2 | | d | 2 | 3 + | |oo| EXT1 | SMC | d | | 2 + | |oo| ROM | 90C63 | r |___| 1 + | |oo| IRQ7 | | |o| _____| + | |oo| IRQ5 | | |o| | J1 | + | |oo| IRQ4 | | STAR |_____| + | |oo| IRQ3 | | | J2 | + | |oo| IRQ2 |___________________| |_____| + |___ ______________| + | | + |_____________________________________________| + +Legend: + +SMC 90C63 ARCNET Controller / Transceiver /Logic +S1 1-3: I/O Base Address Select + 4-6: Memory Base Address Select + 7-8: RAM Offset Select +S2 1-8: Node ID Select +EXT Extended Timeout Select +ROM ROM Enable Select +STAR Selected - Star Topology (PC130E only) + Deselected - Bus Topology (PC130E only) +CR3/CR4 Diagnostic LEDs +J1 BNC RG62/U Connector (PC130E only) +J1 6-position Telephone Jack (PC270E only) +J2 6-position Telephone Jack (PC270E only) + +Setting one of the switches to Off/Open means "1", On/Closed means "0". + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in group S2 are used to set the node ID. +These switches work in a way similar to the PC100-series cards; see that +entry for more information. + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The first three switches in switch group S1 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + + Switch | Hex I/O + 1 2 3 | Address + -------|-------- + 0 0 0 | 260 + 0 0 1 | 290 + 0 1 0 | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 1 | 2F0 + 1 0 0 | 300 + 1 0 1 | 350 + 1 1 0 | 380 + 1 1 1 | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer requires 2K of a 16K block of RAM. The base of this +16K block can be located in any of eight positions. +Switches 4-6 of switch group S1 select the Base of the 16K block. +Within that 16K address space, the buffer may be assigned any one of four +positions, determined by the offset, switches 7 and 8 of group S1. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 4 5 6 7 8 | Address | Address *) + -----------|---------|----------- + 0 0 0 0 0 | C0000 | C2000 + 0 0 0 0 1 | C0800 | C2000 + 0 0 0 1 0 | C1000 | C2000 + 0 0 0 1 1 | C1800 | C2000 + | | + 0 0 1 0 0 | C4000 | C6000 + 0 0 1 0 1 | C4800 | C6000 + 0 0 1 1 0 | C5000 | C6000 + 0 0 1 1 1 | C5800 | C6000 + | | + 0 1 0 0 0 | CC000 | CE000 + 0 1 0 0 1 | CC800 | CE000 + 0 1 0 1 0 | CD000 | CE000 + 0 1 0 1 1 | CD800 | CE000 + | | + 0 1 1 0 0 | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 1 0 1 | D0800 | D2000 + 0 1 1 1 0 | D1000 | D2000 + 0 1 1 1 1 | D1800 | D2000 + | | + 1 0 0 0 0 | D4000 | D6000 + 1 0 0 0 1 | D4800 | D6000 + 1 0 0 1 0 | D5000 | D6000 + 1 0 0 1 1 | D5800 | D6000 + | | + 1 0 1 0 0 | D8000 | DA000 + 1 0 1 0 1 | D8800 | DA000 + 1 0 1 1 0 | D9000 | DA000 + 1 0 1 1 1 | D9800 | DA000 + | | + 1 1 0 0 0 | DC000 | DE000 + 1 1 0 0 1 | DC800 | DE000 + 1 1 0 1 0 | DD000 | DE000 + 1 1 0 1 1 | DD800 | DE000 + | | + 1 1 1 0 0 | E0000 | E2000 + 1 1 1 0 1 | E0800 | E2000 + 1 1 1 1 0 | E1000 | E2000 + 1 1 1 1 1 | E1800 | E2000 + +*) To enable the 8K Boot PROM install the jumper ROM. + The default is jumper ROM not installed. + + +Setting the Timeouts and Interrupt +---------------------------------- + +The jumpers labeled EXT1 and EXT2 are used to determine the timeout +parameters. These two jumpers are normally left open. + +To select a hardware interrupt level set one (only one!) of the jumpers +IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5, IRQ7. The Manufacturer's default is IRQ2. + + +Configuring the PC130E for Star or Bus Topology +----------------------------------------------- + +The single jumper labeled STAR is used to configure the PC130E board for +star or bus topology. +When the jumper is installed, the board may be used in a star network, when +it is removed, the board can be used in a bus topology. + + +Diagnostic LEDs +--------------- + +Two diagnostic LEDs are visible on the rear bracket of the board. +The green LED monitors the network activity: the red one shows the +board activity: + + Green | Status Red | Status + -------|------------------- ---------|------------------- + on | normal activity flash/on | data transfer + blink | reconfiguration off | no data transfer; + off | defective board or | incorrect memory or + | node ID is zero | I/O address + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Standard Microsystems Corp (SMC) ** +PC500/PC550 Longboard (16-bit cards) +------------------------------------- + - from Juergen Seifert + + +STANDARD MICROSYSTEMS CORPORATION (SMC) ARCNET-PC500/PC550 Long Board +===================================================================== + +Note: There is another Version of the PC500 called Short Version, which + is different in hard- and software! The most important differences + are: + - The long board has no Shared memory. + - On the long board the selection of the interrupt is done by binary + coded switch, on the short board directly by jumper. + +[Avery's note: pay special attention to that: the long board HAS NO SHARED +MEMORY. This means the current Linux-ARCnet driver can't use these cards. +I have obtained a PC500Longboard and will be doing some experiments on it in +the future, but don't hold your breath. Thanks again to Juergen Seifert for +his advice about this!] + +This description has been written by Juergen Seifert +using information from the following Original SMC Manual + + "Configuration Guide for + SMC ARCNET-PC500/PC550 + Series Network Controller Boards + Pub. # 900.033 Rev. A + November, 1989" + +ARCNET is a registered trademark of the Datapoint Corporation +SMC is a registered trademark of the Standard Microsystems Corporation + +The PC500 is equipped with a standard BNC female connector for connection +to RG-62/U coax cable. +The board is designed both for point-to-point connection in star networks +and for connection to bus networks. + +The PC550 is equipped with two modular RJ11-type jacks for connection +to twisted pair wiring. +It can be used in a star or a daisy-chained (BUS) network. + + 1 + 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 + ____________________________________________________________________ + < | SW1 | | SW2 | | + > |_____________________| |_____________| | + < IRQ |I/O Addr | + > ___| + < CR4 |___| + > CR3 |___| + < ___| + > N | | 8 + < o | | 7 + > d | S | 6 + < e | W | 5 + > A | 3 | 4 + < d | | 3 + > d | | 2 + < r |___| 1 + > |o| _____| + < |o| | J1 | + > 3 1 JP6 |_____| + < |o|o| JP2 | J2 | + > |o|o| |_____| + < 4 2__ ______________| + > | | | + <____| |_____________________________________________| + +Legend: + +SW1 1-6: I/O Base Address Select + 7-10: Interrupt Select +SW2 1-6: Reserved for Future Use +SW3 1-8: Node ID Select +JP2 1-4: Extended Timeout Select +JP6 Selected - Star Topology (PC500 only) + Deselected - Bus Topology (PC500 only) +CR3 Green Monitors Network Activity +CR4 Red Monitors Board Activity +J1 BNC RG62/U Connector (PC500 only) +J1 6-position Telephone Jack (PC550 only) +J2 6-position Telephone Jack (PC550 only) + +Setting one of the switches to Off/Open means "1", On/Closed means "0". + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in group SW3 are used to set the node ID. Each node +attached to the network must have an unique node ID which must be +different from 0. +Switch 1 serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 1 | 1 + 2 | 2 + 3 | 4 + 4 | 8 + 5 | 16 + 6 | 32 + 7 | 64 + 8 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch | Hex | Decimal + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID + ----------------|---------|--------- + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 + . . . | | + 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 + . . . | | + 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 + . . . | | + 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The first six switches in switch group SW1 are used to select one +of 32 possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + Switch | Hex I/O + 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Address + -------------|-------- + 0 1 0 0 0 0 | 200 + 0 1 0 0 0 1 | 210 + 0 1 0 0 1 0 | 220 + 0 1 0 0 1 1 | 230 + 0 1 0 1 0 0 | 240 + 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 250 + 0 1 0 1 1 0 | 260 + 0 1 0 1 1 1 | 270 + 0 1 1 0 0 0 | 280 + 0 1 1 0 0 1 | 290 + 0 1 1 0 1 0 | 2A0 + 0 1 1 0 1 1 | 2B0 + 0 1 1 1 0 0 | 2C0 + 0 1 1 1 0 1 | 2D0 + 0 1 1 1 1 0 | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 1 1 1 1 | 2F0 + 1 1 0 0 0 0 | 300 + 1 1 0 0 0 1 | 310 + 1 1 0 0 1 0 | 320 + 1 1 0 0 1 1 | 330 + 1 1 0 1 0 0 | 340 + 1 1 0 1 0 1 | 350 + 1 1 0 1 1 0 | 360 + 1 1 0 1 1 1 | 370 + 1 1 1 0 0 0 | 380 + 1 1 1 0 0 1 | 390 + 1 1 1 0 1 0 | 3A0 + 1 1 1 0 1 1 | 3B0 + 1 1 1 1 0 0 | 3C0 + 1 1 1 1 0 1 | 3D0 + 1 1 1 1 1 0 | 3E0 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 | 3F0 + + +Setting the Interrupt +--------------------- + +Switches seven through ten of switch group SW1 are used to select the +interrupt level. The interrupt level is binary coded, so selections +from 0 to 15 would be possible, but only the following eight values will +be supported: 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12. + + Switch | IRQ + 10 9 8 7 | + ---------|-------- + 0 0 1 1 | 3 + 0 1 0 0 | 4 + 0 1 0 1 | 5 + 0 1 1 1 | 7 + 1 0 0 1 | 9 (=2) (default) + 1 0 1 0 | 10 + 1 0 1 1 | 11 + 1 1 0 0 | 12 + + +Setting the Timeouts +-------------------- + +The two jumpers JP2 (1-4) are used to determine the timeout parameters. +These two jumpers are normally left open. +Refer to the COM9026 Data Sheet for alternate configurations. + + +Configuring the PC500 for Star or Bus Topology +---------------------------------------------- + +The single jumper labeled JP6 is used to configure the PC500 board for +star or bus topology. +When the jumper is installed, the board may be used in a star network, when +it is removed, the board can be used in a bus topology. + + +Diagnostic LEDs +--------------- + +Two diagnostic LEDs are visible on the rear bracket of the board. +The green LED monitors the network activity: the red one shows the +board activity: + + Green | Status Red | Status + -------|------------------- ---------|------------------- + on | normal activity flash/on | data transfer + blink | reconfiguration off | no data transfer; + off | defective board or | incorrect memory or + | node ID is zero | I/O address + + +***************************************************************************** + +** SMC ** +PC710 (8-bit card) +------------------ + - from J.S. van Oosten + +Note: this data is gathered by experimenting and looking at info of other +cards. However, I'm sure I got 99% of the settings right. + +The SMC710 card resembles the PC270 card, but is much more basic (i.e. no +LEDs, RJ11 jacks, etc.) and 8 bit. Here's a little drawing: + + _______________________________________ + | +---------+ +---------+ |____ + | | S2 | | S1 | | + | +---------+ +---------+ | + | | + | +===+ __ | + | | R | | | X-tal ###___ + | | O | |__| ####__'| + | | M | || ### + | +===+ | + | | + | .. JP1 +----------+ | + | .. | big chip | | + | .. | 90C63 | | + | .. | | | + | .. +----------+ | + ------- ----------- + ||||||||||||||||||||| + +The row of jumpers at JP1 actually consists of 8 jumpers, (sometimes +labelled) the same as on the PC270, from top to bottom: EXT2, EXT1, ROM, +IRQ7, IRQ5, IRQ4, IRQ3, IRQ2 (gee, wonder what they would do? :-) ) + +S1 and S2 perform the same function as on the PC270, only their numbers +are swapped (S1 is the nodeaddress, S2 sets IO- and RAM-address). + +I know it works when connected to a PC110 type ARCnet board. + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Possibly SMC ** +LCS-8830(-T) (8 and 16-bit cards) +--------------------------------- + - from Mathias Katzer + - Marek Michalkiewicz says the + LCS-8830 is slightly different from LCS-8830-T. These are 8 bit, BUS + only (the JP0 jumper is hardwired), and BNC only. + +This is a LCS-8830-T made by SMC, I think ('SMC' only appears on one PLCC, +nowhere else, not even on the few Xeroxed sheets from the manual). + +SMC ARCnet Board Type LCS-8830-T + + ------------------------------------ + | | + | JP3 88 8 JP2 | + | ##### | \ | + | ##### ET1 ET2 ###| + | 8 ###| + | U3 SW 1 JP0 ###| Phone Jacks + | -- ###| + | | | | + | | | SW2 | + | | | | + | | | ##### | + | -- ##### #### BNC Connector + | #### + | 888888 JP1 | + | 234567 | + -- ------- + ||||||||||||||||||||||||||| + -------------------------- + + +SW1: DIP-Switches for Station Address +SW2: DIP-Switches for Memory Base and I/O Base addresses + +JP0: If closed, internal termination on (default open) +JP1: IRQ Jumpers +JP2: Boot-ROM enabled if closed +JP3: Jumpers for response timeout + +U3: Boot-ROM Socket + + +ET1 ET2 Response Time Idle Time Reconfiguration Time + + 78 86 840 + X 285 316 1680 + X 563 624 1680 + X X 1130 1237 1680 + +(X means closed jumper) + +(DIP-Switch downwards means "0") + +The station address is binary-coded with SW1. + +The I/O base address is coded with DIP-Switches 6,7 and 8 of SW2: + +Switches Base +678 Address +000 260-26f +100 290-29f +010 2e0-2ef +110 2f0-2ff +001 300-30f +101 350-35f +011 380-38f +111 3e0-3ef + + +DIP Switches 1-5 of SW2 encode the RAM and ROM Address Range: + +Switches RAM ROM +12345 Address Range Address Range +00000 C:0000-C:07ff C:2000-C:3fff +10000 C:0800-C:0fff +01000 C:1000-C:17ff +11000 C:1800-C:1fff +00100 C:4000-C:47ff C:6000-C:7fff +10100 C:4800-C:4fff +01100 C:5000-C:57ff +11100 C:5800-C:5fff +00010 C:C000-C:C7ff C:E000-C:ffff +10010 C:C800-C:Cfff +01010 C:D000-C:D7ff +11010 C:D800-C:Dfff +00110 D:0000-D:07ff D:2000-D:3fff +10110 D:0800-D:0fff +01110 D:1000-D:17ff +11110 D:1800-D:1fff +00001 D:4000-D:47ff D:6000-D:7fff +10001 D:4800-D:4fff +01001 D:5000-D:57ff +11001 D:5800-D:5fff +00101 D:8000-D:87ff D:A000-D:bfff +10101 D:8800-D:8fff +01101 D:9000-D:97ff +11101 D:9800-D:9fff +00011 D:C000-D:c7ff D:E000-D:ffff +10011 D:C800-D:cfff +01011 D:D000-D:d7ff +11011 D:D800-D:dfff +00111 E:0000-E:07ff E:2000-E:3fff +10111 E:0800-E:0fff +01111 E:1000-E:17ff +11111 E:1800-E:1fff + + +***************************************************************************** + +** PureData Corp ** +PDI507 (8-bit card) +-------------------- + - from Mark Rejhon (slight modifications by Avery) + - Avery's note: I think PDI508 cards (but definitely NOT PDI508Plus cards) + are mostly the same as this. PDI508Plus cards appear to be mainly + software-configured. + +Jumpers: + There is a jumper array at the bottom of the card, near the edge + connector. This array is labelled J1. They control the IRQs and + something else. Put only one jumper on the IRQ pins. + + ETS1, ETS2 are for timing on very long distance networks. See the + more general information near the top of this file. + + There is a J2 jumper on two pins. A jumper should be put on them, + since it was already there when I got the card. I don't know what + this jumper is for though. + + There is a two-jumper array for J3. I don't know what it is for, + but there were already two jumpers on it when I got the card. It's + a six pin grid in a two-by-three fashion. The jumpers were + configured as follows: + + .-------. + o | o o | + :-------: ------> Accessible end of card with connectors + o | o o | in this direction -------> + `-------' + +Carl de Billy explains J3 and J4: + + J3 Diagram: + + .-------. + o | o o | + :-------: TWIST Technology + o | o o | + `-------' + .-------. + | o o | o + :-------: COAX Technology + | o o | o + `-------' + + - If using coax cable in a bus topology the J4 jumper must be removed; + place it on one pin. + + - If using bus topology with twisted pair wiring move the J3 + jumpers so they connect the middle pin and the pins closest to the RJ11 + Connectors. Also the J4 jumper must be removed; place it on one pin of + J4 jumper for storage. + + - If using star topology with twisted pair wiring move the J3 + jumpers so they connect the middle pin and the pins closest to the RJ11 + connectors. + + +DIP Switches: + + The DIP switches accessible on the accessible end of the card while + it is installed, is used to set the ARCnet address. There are 8 + switches. Use an address from 1 to 254. + + Switch No. + 12345678 ARCnet address + ----------------------------------------- + 00000000 FF (Don't use this!) + 00000001 FE + 00000010 FD + .... + 11111101 2 + 11111110 1 + 11111111 0 (Don't use this!) + + There is another array of eight DIP switches at the top of the + card. There are five labelled MS0-MS4 which seem to control the + memory address, and another three labelled IO0-IO2 which seem to + control the base I/O address of the card. + + This was difficult to test by trial and error, and the I/O addresses + are in a weird order. This was tested by setting the DIP switches, + rebooting the computer, and attempting to load ARCETHER at various + addresses (mostly between 0x200 and 0x400). The address that caused + the red transmit LED to blink, is the one that I thought works. + + Also, the address 0x3D0 seem to have a special meaning, since the + ARCETHER packet driver loaded fine, but without the red LED + blinking. I don't know what 0x3D0 is for though. I recommend using + an address of 0x300 since Windows may not like addresses below + 0x300. + + IO Switch No. + 210 I/O address + ------------------------------- + 111 0x260 + 110 0x290 + 101 0x2E0 + 100 0x2F0 + 011 0x300 + 010 0x350 + 001 0x380 + 000 0x3E0 + + The memory switches set a reserved address space of 0x1000 bytes + (0x100 segment units, or 4k). For example if I set an address of + 0xD000, it will use up addresses 0xD000 to 0xD100. + + The memory switches were tested by booting using QEMM386 stealth, + and using LOADHI to see what address automatically became excluded + from the upper memory regions, and then attempting to load ARCETHER + using these addresses. + + I recommend using an ARCnet memory address of 0xD000, and putting + the EMS page frame at 0xC000 while using QEMM stealth mode. That + way, you get contiguous high memory from 0xD100 almost all the way + the end of the megabyte. + + Memory Switch 0 (MS0) didn't seem to work properly when set to OFF + on my card. It could be malfunctioning on my card. Experiment with + it ON first, and if it doesn't work, set it to OFF. (It may be a + modifier for the 0x200 bit?) + + MS Switch No. + 43210 Memory address + -------------------------------- + 00001 0xE100 (guessed - was not detected by QEMM) + 00011 0xE000 (guessed - was not detected by QEMM) + 00101 0xDD00 + 00111 0xDC00 + 01001 0xD900 + 01011 0xD800 + 01101 0xD500 + 01111 0xD400 + 10001 0xD100 + 10011 0xD000 + 10101 0xCD00 + 10111 0xCC00 + 11001 0xC900 (guessed - crashes tested system) + 11011 0xC800 (guessed - crashes tested system) + 11101 0xC500 (guessed - crashes tested system) + 11111 0xC400 (guessed - crashes tested system) + + +***************************************************************************** + +** CNet Technology Inc. ** +120 Series (8-bit cards) +------------------------ + - from Juergen Seifert + + +CNET TECHNOLOGY INC. (CNet) ARCNET 120A SERIES +============================================== + +This description has been written by Juergen Seifert +using information from the following Original CNet Manual + + "ARCNET + USER'S MANUAL + for + CN120A + CN120AB + CN120TP + CN120ST + CN120SBT + P/N:12-01-0007 + Revision 3.00" + +ARCNET is a registered trademark of the Datapoint Corporation + +P/N 120A ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Star +P/N 120AB ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Bus +P/N 120TP ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Twisted Pair +P/N 120ST ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Star, Twisted Pair +P/N 120SBT ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Star, Bus, Twisted Pair + + __________________________________________________________________ + | | + | ___| + | LED |___| + | ___| + | N | | ID7 + | o | | ID6 + | d | S | ID5 + | e | W | ID4 + | ___________________ A | 2 | ID3 + | | | d | | ID2 + | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 d | | ID1 + | | | _________________ r |___| ID0 + | | 90C65 || SW1 | ____| + | JP 8 7 | ||_________________| | | + | |o|o| JP1 | | | J2 | + | |o|o| |oo| | | JP 1 1 1 | | + | ______________ | | 0 1 2 |____| + | | PROM | |___________________| |o|o|o| _____| + | > SOCKET | JP 6 5 4 3 2 |o|o|o| | J1 | + | |______________| |o|o|o|o|o| |o|o|o| |_____| + |_____ |o|o|o|o|o| ______________| + | | + |_____________________________________________| + +Legend: + +90C65 ARCNET Probe +S1 1-5: Base Memory Address Select + 6-8: Base I/O Address Select +S2 1-8: Node ID Select (ID0-ID7) +JP1 ROM Enable Select +JP2 IRQ2 +JP3 IRQ3 +JP4 IRQ4 +JP5 IRQ5 +JP6 IRQ7 +JP7/JP8 ET1, ET2 Timeout Parameters +JP10/JP11 Coax / Twisted Pair Select (CN120ST/SBT only) +JP12 Terminator Select (CN120AB/ST/SBT only) +J1 BNC RG62/U Connector (all except CN120TP) +J2 Two 6-position Telephone Jack (CN120TP/ST/SBT only) + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached +to the network must have an unique node ID which must be different from 0. +Switch 1 (ID0) serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Label | Value + -------|-------|------- + 1 | ID0 | 1 + 2 | ID1 | 2 + 3 | ID2 | 4 + 4 | ID3 | 8 + 5 | ID4 | 16 + 6 | ID5 | 32 + 7 | ID6 | 64 + 8 | ID7 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch | Hex | Decimal + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID + ----------------|---------|--------- + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 + . . . | | + 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 + . . . | | + 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 + . . . | | + 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The last three switches in switch block SW1 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + + Switch | Hex I/O + 6 7 8 | Address + ------------|-------- + ON ON ON | 260 + OFF ON ON | 290 + ON OFF ON | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + OFF OFF ON | 2F0 + ON ON OFF | 300 + OFF ON OFF | 350 + ON OFF OFF | 380 + OFF OFF OFF | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be +located in any of eight positions. The address of the Boot Prom is +memory base + 8K or memory base + 0x2000. +Switches 1-5 of switch block SW1 select the Memory Base address. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 1 2 3 4 5 | Address | Address *) + --------------------|---------|----------- + ON ON ON ON ON | C0000 | C2000 + ON ON OFF ON ON | C4000 | C6000 + ON ON ON OFF ON | CC000 | CE000 + ON ON OFF OFF ON | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + ON ON ON ON OFF | D4000 | D6000 + ON ON OFF ON OFF | D8000 | DA000 + ON ON ON OFF OFF | DC000 | DE000 + ON ON OFF OFF OFF | E0000 | E2000 + +*) To enable the Boot ROM install the jumper JP1 + +Note: Since the switches 1 and 2 are always set to ON it may be possible + that they can be used to add an offset of 2K, 4K or 6K to the base + address, but this feature is not documented in the manual and I + haven't tested it yet. + + +Setting the Interrupt Line +-------------------------- + +To select a hardware interrupt level install one (only one!) of the jumpers +JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6. JP2 is the default. + + Jumper | IRQ + -------|----- + 2 | 2 + 3 | 3 + 4 | 4 + 5 | 5 + 6 | 7 + + +Setting the Internal Terminator on CN120AB/TP/SBT +-------------------------------------------------- + +The jumper JP12 is used to enable the internal terminator. + + ----- + 0 | 0 | + ----- ON | | ON + | 0 | | 0 | + | | OFF ----- OFF + | 0 | 0 + ----- + Terminator Terminator + disabled enabled + + +Selecting the Connector Type on CN120ST/SBT +------------------------------------------- + + JP10 JP11 JP10 JP11 + ----- ----- + 0 0 | 0 | | 0 | + ----- ----- | | | | + | 0 | | 0 | | 0 | | 0 | + | | | | ----- ----- + | 0 | | 0 | 0 0 + ----- ----- + Coaxial Cable Twisted Pair Cable + (Default) + + +Setting the Timeout Parameters +------------------------------ + +The jumpers labeled EXT1 and EXT2 are used to determine the timeout +parameters. These two jumpers are normally left open. + + + +***************************************************************************** + +** CNet Technology Inc. ** +160 Series (16-bit cards) +------------------------- + - from Juergen Seifert + +CNET TECHNOLOGY INC. (CNet) ARCNET 160A SERIES +============================================== + +This description has been written by Juergen Seifert +using information from the following Original CNet Manual + + "ARCNET + USER'S MANUAL + for + CN160A + CN160AB + CN160TP + P/N:12-01-0006 + Revision 3.00" + +ARCNET is a registered trademark of the Datapoint Corporation + +P/N 160A ARCNET 16 bit XT/AT Star +P/N 160AB ARCNET 16 bit XT/AT Bus +P/N 160TP ARCNET 16 bit XT/AT Twisted Pair + + ___________________________________________________________________ + < _________________________ ___| + > |oo| JP2 | | LED |___| + < |oo| JP1 | 9026 | LED |___| + > |_________________________| ___| + < N | | ID7 + > 1 o | | ID6 + < 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 d | S | ID5 + > _______________ _____________________ e | W | ID4 + < | PROM | | SW1 | A | 2 | ID3 + > > SOCKET | |_____________________| d | | ID2 + < |_______________| | IO-Base | MEM | d | | ID1 + > r |___| ID0 + < ____| + > | | + < | J1 | + > | | + < |____| + > 1 1 1 1 | + < 3 4 5 6 7 JP 8 9 0 1 2 3 | + > |o|o|o|o|o| |o|o|o|o|o|o| | + < |o|o|o|o|o| __ |o|o|o|o|o|o| ___________| + > | | | + <____________| |_______________________________________| + +Legend: + +9026 ARCNET Probe +SW1 1-6: Base I/O Address Select + 7-10: Base Memory Address Select +SW2 1-8: Node ID Select (ID0-ID7) +JP1/JP2 ET1, ET2 Timeout Parameters +JP3-JP13 Interrupt Select +J1 BNC RG62/U Connector (CN160A/AB only) +J1 Two 6-position Telephone Jack (CN160TP only) +LED + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached +to the network must have an unique node ID which must be different from 0. +Switch 1 (ID0) serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Label | Value + -------|-------|------- + 1 | ID0 | 1 + 2 | ID1 | 2 + 3 | ID2 | 4 + 4 | ID3 | 8 + 5 | ID4 | 16 + 6 | ID5 | 32 + 7 | ID6 | 64 + 8 | ID7 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch | Hex | Decimal + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID + ----------------|---------|--------- + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 + . . . | | + 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 + . . . | | + 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 + . . . | | + 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The first six switches in switch block SW1 are used to select the I/O Base +address using the following table: + + Switch | Hex I/O + 1 2 3 4 5 6 | Address + ------------------------|-------- + OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON | 260 + OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF | 290 + OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF | 2F0 + OFF OFF ON ON ON ON | 300 + OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF | 350 + OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON | 380 + OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON | 3E0 + +Note: Other IO-Base addresses seem to be selectable, but only the above + combinations are documented. + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The switches 7-10 of switch block SW1 are used to select the Memory +Base address of the RAM (2K) and the PROM. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 7 8 9 10 | Address | Address + ----------------|---------|----------- + OFF OFF ON ON | C0000 | C8000 + OFF OFF ON OFF | D0000 | D8000 (Default) + OFF OFF OFF ON | E0000 | E8000 + +Note: Other MEM-Base addresses seem to be selectable, but only the above + combinations are documented. + + +Setting the Interrupt Line +-------------------------- + +To select a hardware interrupt level install one (only one!) of the jumpers +JP3 through JP13 using the following table: + + Jumper | IRQ + -------|----------------- + 3 | 14 + 4 | 15 + 5 | 12 + 6 | 11 + 7 | 10 + 8 | 3 + 9 | 4 + 10 | 5 + 11 | 6 + 12 | 7 + 13 | 2 (=9) Default! + +Note: - Do not use JP11=IRQ6, it may conflict with your Floppy Disk + Controller + - Use JP3=IRQ14 only, if you don't have an IDE-, MFM-, or RLL- + Hard Disk, it may conflict with their controllers + + +Setting the Timeout Parameters +------------------------------ + +The jumpers labeled JP1 and JP2 are used to determine the timeout +parameters. These two jumpers are normally left open. + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Lantech ** +8-bit card, unknown model +------------------------- + - from Vlad Lungu - his e-mail address seemed broken at + the time I tried to reach him. Sorry Vlad, if you didn't get my reply. + + ________________________________________________________________ + | 1 8 | + | ___________ __| + | | SW1 | LED |__| + | |__________| | + | ___| + | _____________________ |S | 8 + | | | |W | + | | | |2 | + | | | |__| 1 + | | UM9065L | |o| JP4 ____|____ + | | | |o| | CN | + | | | |________| + | | | | + | |___________________| | + | | + | | + | _____________ | + | | | | + | | PROM | |ooooo| JP6 | + | |____________| |ooooo| | + |_____________ _ _| + |____________________________________________| |__| + + +UM9065L : ARCnet Controller + +SW 1 : Shared Memory Address and I/O Base + + ON=0 + + 12345|Memory Address + -----|-------------- + 00001| D4000 + 00010| CC000 + 00110| D0000 + 01110| D1000 + 01101| D9000 + 10010| CC800 + 10011| DC800 + 11110| D1800 + +It seems that the bits are considered in reverse order. Also, you must +observe that some of those addresses are unusual and I didn't probe them; I +used a memory dump in DOS to identify them. For the 00000 configuration and +some others that I didn't write here the card seems to conflict with the +video card (an S3 GENDAC). I leave the full decoding of those addresses to +you. + + 678| I/O Address + ---|------------ + 000| 260 + 001| failed probe + 010| 2E0 + 011| 380 + 100| 290 + 101| 350 + 110| failed probe + 111| 3E0 + +SW 2 : Node ID (binary coded) + +JP 4 : Boot PROM enable CLOSE - enabled + OPEN - disabled + +JP 6 : IRQ set (ONLY ONE jumper on 1-5 for IRQ 2-6) + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Acer ** +8-bit card, Model 5210-003 +-------------------------- + - from Vojtech Pavlik using portions of the existing + arcnet-hardware file. + +This is a 90C26 based card. Its configuration seems similar to the SMC +PC100, but has some additional jumpers I don't know the meaning of. + + __ + | | + ___________|__|_________________________ + | | | | + | | BNC | | + | |______| ___| + | _____________________ |___ + | | | | + | | Hybrid IC | | + | | | o|o J1 | + | |_____________________| 8|8 | + | 8|8 J5 | + | o|o | + | 8|8 | + |__ 8|8 | + (|__| LED o|o | + | 8|8 | + | 8|8 J15 | + | | + | _____ | + | | | _____ | + | | | | | ___| + | | | | | | + | _____ | ROM | | UFS | | + | | | | | | | | + | | | ___ | | | | | + | | | | | |__.__| |__.__| | + | | NCR | |XTL| _____ _____ | + | | | |___| | | | | | + | |90C26| | | | | | + | | | | RAM | | UFS | | + | | | J17 o|o | | | | | + | | | J16 o|o | | | | | + | |__.__| |__.__| |__.__| | + | ___ | + | | |8 | + | |SW2| | + | | | | + | |___|1 | + | ___ | + | | |10 J18 o|o | + | | | o|o | + | |SW1| o|o | + | | | J21 o|o | + | |___|1 | + | | + |____________________________________| + + +Legend: + +90C26 ARCNET Chip +XTL 20 MHz Crystal +SW1 1-6 Base I/O Address Select + 7-10 Memory Address Select +SW2 1-8 Node ID Select (ID0-ID7) +J1-J5 IRQ Select +J6-J21 Unknown (Probably extra timeouts & ROM enable ...) +LED1 Activity LED +BNC Coax connector (STAR ARCnet) +RAM 2k of SRAM +ROM Boot ROM socket +UFS Unidentified Flying Sockets + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached +to the network must have an unique node ID which must not be 0. +Switch 1 (ID0) serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +Setting one of the switches to OFF means "1", ON means "0". + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 1 | 1 + 2 | 2 + 3 | 4 + 4 | 8 + 5 | 16 + 6 | 32 + 7 | 64 + 8 | 128 + +Don't set this to 0 or 255; these values are reserved. + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The switches 1 to 6 of switch block SW1 are used to select one +of 32 possible I/O Base addresses using the following tables + + | Hex + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 1 | 200 + 2 | 100 + 3 | 80 + 4 | 40 + 5 | 20 + 6 | 10 + +The I/O address is sum of all switches set to "1". Remember that +the I/O address space bellow 0x200 is RESERVED for mainboard, so +switch 1 should be ALWAYS SET TO OFF. + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be +located in any of sixteen positions. However, the addresses below +A0000 are likely to cause system hang because there's main RAM. + +Jumpers 7-10 of switch block SW1 select the Memory Base address. + + Switch | Hex RAM + 7 8 9 10 | Address + ----------------|--------- + OFF OFF OFF OFF | F0000 (conflicts with main BIOS) + OFF OFF OFF ON | E0000 + OFF OFF ON OFF | D0000 + OFF OFF ON ON | C0000 (conflicts with video BIOS) + OFF ON OFF OFF | B0000 (conflicts with mono video) + OFF ON OFF ON | A0000 (conflicts with graphics) + + +Setting the Interrupt Line +-------------------------- + +Jumpers 1-5 of the jumper block J1 control the IRQ level. ON means +shorted, OFF means open. + + Jumper | IRQ + 1 2 3 4 5 | + ---------------------------- + ON OFF OFF OFF OFF | 7 + OFF ON OFF OFF OFF | 5 + OFF OFF ON OFF OFF | 4 + OFF OFF OFF ON OFF | 3 + OFF OFF OFF OFF ON | 2 + + +Unknown jumpers & sockets +------------------------- + +I know nothing about these. I just guess that J16&J17 are timeout +jumpers and maybe one of J18-J21 selects ROM. Also J6-J10 and +J11-J15 are connecting IRQ2-7 to some pins on the UFSs. I can't +guess the purpose. + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Datapoint? ** +LAN-ARC-8, an 8-bit card +------------------------ + - from Vojtech Pavlik + +This is another SMC 90C65-based ARCnet card. I couldn't identify the +manufacturer, but it might be DataPoint, because the card has the +original arcNet logo in its upper right corner. + + _______________________________________________________ + | _________ | + | | SW2 | ON arcNet | + | |_________| OFF ___| + | _____________ 1 ______ 8 | | 8 + | | | SW1 | XTAL | ____________ | S | + | > RAM (2k) | |______|| | | W | + | |_____________| | H | | 3 | + | _________|_____ y | |___| 1 + | _________ | | |b | | + | |_________| | | |r | | + | | SMC | |i | | + | | 90C65| |d | | + | _________ | | | | | + | | SW1 | ON | | |I | | + | |_________| OFF |_________|_____/C | _____| + | 1 8 | | | |___ + | ______________ | | | BNC |___| + | | | |____________| |_____| + | > EPROM SOCKET | _____________ | + | |______________| |_____________| | + | ______________| + | | + |________________________________________| + +Legend: + +90C65 ARCNET Chip +SW1 1-5: Base Memory Address Select + 6-8: Base I/O Address Select +SW2 1-8: Node ID Select +SW3 1-5: IRQ Select + 6-7: Extra Timeout + 8 : ROM Enable +BNC Coax connector +XTAL 20 MHz Crystal + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in SW3 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached +to the network must have an unique node ID which must not be 0. +Switch 1 serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 1 | 1 + 2 | 2 + 3 | 4 + 4 | 8 + 5 | 16 + 6 | 32 + 7 | 64 + 8 | 128 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The last three switches in switch block SW1 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + + Switch | Hex I/O + 6 7 8 | Address + ------------|-------- + ON ON ON | 260 + OFF ON ON | 290 + ON OFF ON | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + OFF OFF ON | 2F0 + ON ON OFF | 300 + OFF ON OFF | 350 + ON OFF OFF | 380 + OFF OFF OFF | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be +located in any of eight positions. The address of the Boot Prom is +memory base + 0x2000. +Jumpers 3-5 of switch block SW1 select the Memory Base address. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 1 2 3 4 5 | Address | Address *) + --------------------|---------|----------- + ON ON ON ON ON | C0000 | C2000 + ON ON OFF ON ON | C4000 | C6000 + ON ON ON OFF ON | CC000 | CE000 + ON ON OFF OFF ON | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + ON ON ON ON OFF | D4000 | D6000 + ON ON OFF ON OFF | D8000 | DA000 + ON ON ON OFF OFF | DC000 | DE000 + ON ON OFF OFF OFF | E0000 | E2000 + +*) To enable the Boot ROM set the switch 8 of switch block SW3 to position ON. + +The switches 1 and 2 probably add 0x0800 and 0x1000 to RAM base address. + + +Setting the Interrupt Line +-------------------------- + +Switches 1-5 of the switch block SW3 control the IRQ level. + + Jumper | IRQ + 1 2 3 4 5 | + ---------------------------- + ON OFF OFF OFF OFF | 3 + OFF ON OFF OFF OFF | 4 + OFF OFF ON OFF OFF | 5 + OFF OFF OFF ON OFF | 7 + OFF OFF OFF OFF ON | 2 + + +Setting the Timeout Parameters +------------------------------ + +The switches 6-7 of the switch block SW3 are used to determine the timeout +parameters. These two switches are normally left in the OFF position. + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Topware ** +8-bit card, TA-ARC/10 +------------------------- + - from Vojtech Pavlik + +This is another very similar 90C65 card. Most of the switches and jumpers +are the same as on other clones. + + _____________________________________________________________________ +| ___________ | | ______ | +| |SW2 NODE ID| | | | XTAL | | +| |___________| | Hybrid IC | |______| | +| ___________ | | __| +| |SW1 MEM+I/O| |_________________________| LED1|__|) +| |___________| 1 2 | +| J3 |o|o| TIMEOUT ______| +| ______________ |o|o| | | +| | | ___________________ | RJ | +| > EPROM SOCKET | | \ |------| +|J2 |______________| | | | | +||o| | | |______| +||o| ROM ENABLE | SMC | _________ | +| _____________ | 90C65 | |_________| _____| +| | | | | | |___ +| > RAM (2k) | | | | BNC |___| +| |_____________| | | |_____| +| |____________________| | +| ________ IRQ 2 3 4 5 7 ___________ | +||________| |o|o|o|o|o| |___________| | +|________ J1|o|o|o|o|o| ______________| + | | + |_____________________________________________| + +Legend: + +90C65 ARCNET Chip +XTAL 20 MHz Crystal +SW1 1-5 Base Memory Address Select + 6-8 Base I/O Address Select +SW2 1-8 Node ID Select (ID0-ID7) +J1 IRQ Select +J2 ROM Enable +J3 Extra Timeout +LED1 Activity LED +BNC Coax connector (BUS ARCnet) +RJ Twisted Pair Connector (daisy chain) + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached to +the network must have an unique node ID which must not be 0. Switch 1 (ID0) +serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Label | Value + -------|-------|------- + 1 | ID0 | 1 + 2 | ID1 | 2 + 3 | ID2 | 4 + 4 | ID3 | 8 + 5 | ID4 | 16 + 6 | ID5 | 32 + 7 | ID6 | 64 + 8 | ID7 | 128 + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The last three switches in switch block SW1 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table: + + + Switch | Hex I/O + 6 7 8 | Address + ------------|-------- + ON ON ON | 260 (Manufacturer's default) + OFF ON ON | 290 + ON OFF ON | 2E0 + OFF OFF ON | 2F0 + ON ON OFF | 300 + OFF ON OFF | 350 + ON OFF OFF | 380 + OFF OFF OFF | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be +located in any of eight positions. The address of the Boot Prom is +memory base + 0x2000. +Jumpers 3-5 of switch block SW1 select the Memory Base address. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 1 2 3 4 5 | Address | Address *) + --------------------|---------|----------- + ON ON ON ON ON | C0000 | C2000 + ON ON OFF ON ON | C4000 | C6000 (Manufacturer's default) + ON ON ON OFF ON | CC000 | CE000 + ON ON OFF OFF ON | D0000 | D2000 + ON ON ON ON OFF | D4000 | D6000 + ON ON OFF ON OFF | D8000 | DA000 + ON ON ON OFF OFF | DC000 | DE000 + ON ON OFF OFF OFF | E0000 | E2000 + +*) To enable the Boot ROM short the jumper J2. + +The jumpers 1 and 2 probably add 0x0800 and 0x1000 to RAM address. + + +Setting the Interrupt Line +-------------------------- + +Jumpers 1-5 of the jumper block J1 control the IRQ level. ON means +shorted, OFF means open. + + Jumper | IRQ + 1 2 3 4 5 | + ---------------------------- + ON OFF OFF OFF OFF | 2 + OFF ON OFF OFF OFF | 3 + OFF OFF ON OFF OFF | 4 + OFF OFF OFF ON OFF | 5 + OFF OFF OFF OFF ON | 7 + + +Setting the Timeout Parameters +------------------------------ + +The jumpers J3 are used to set the timeout parameters. These two +jumpers are normally left open. + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Thomas-Conrad ** +Model #500-6242-0097 REV A (8-bit card) +--------------------------------------- + - from Lars Karlsson <100617.3473@compuserve.com> + + ________________________________________________________ + | ________ ________ |_____ + | |........| |........| | + | |________| |________| ___| + | SW 3 SW 1 | | + | Base I/O Base Addr. Station | | + | address | | + | ______ switch | | + | | | | | + | | | |___| + | | | ______ |___._ + | |______| |______| ____| BNC + | Jumper- _____| Connector + | Main chip block _ __| ' + | | | | RJ Connector + | |_| | with 110 Ohm + | |__ Terminator + | ___________ __| + | |...........| | RJ-jack + | |...........| _____ | (unused) + | |___________| |_____| |__ + | Boot PROM socket IRQ-jumpers |_ Diagnostic + |________ __ _| LED (red) + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |________| + | + | + +And here are the settings for some of the switches and jumpers on the cards. + + + I/O + + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 + +2E0----- 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 +2F0----- 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 +300----- 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 +350----- 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 + +"0" in the above example means switch is off "1" means that it is on. + + + ShMem address. + + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 + +CX00--0 0 1 1 | | | +DX00--0 0 1 0 | +X000--------- 1 1 | +X400--------- 1 0 | +X800--------- 0 1 | +XC00--------- 0 0 +ENHANCED----------- 1 +COMPATIBLE--------- 0 + + + IRQ + + + 3 4 5 7 2 + . . . . . + . . . . . + + +There is a DIP-switch with 8 switches, used to set the shared memory address +to be used. The first 6 switches set the address, the 7th doesn't have any +function, and the 8th switch is used to select "compatible" or "enhanced". +When I got my two cards, one of them had this switch set to "enhanced". That +card didn't work at all, it wasn't even recognized by the driver. The other +card had this switch set to "compatible" and it behaved absolutely normally. I +guess that the switch on one of the cards, must have been changed accidentally +when the card was taken out of its former host. The question remains +unanswered, what is the purpose of the "enhanced" position? + +[Avery's note: "enhanced" probably either disables shared memory (use IO +ports instead) or disables IO ports (use memory addresses instead). This +varies by the type of card involved. I fail to see how either of these +enhance anything. Send me more detailed information about this mode, or +just use "compatible" mode instead.] + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Waterloo Microsystems Inc. ?? ** +8-bit card (C) 1985 +------------------- + - from Robert Michael Best + +[Avery's note: these don't work with my driver for some reason. These cards +SEEM to have settings similar to the PDI508Plus, which is +software-configured and doesn't work with my driver either. The "Waterloo +chip" is a boot PROM, probably designed specifically for the University of +Waterloo. If you have any further information about this card, please +e-mail me.] + +The probe has not been able to detect the card on any of the J2 settings, +and I tried them again with the "Waterloo" chip removed. + + _____________________________________________________________________ +| \/ \/ ___ __ __ | +| C4 C4 |^| | M || ^ ||^| | +| -- -- |_| | 5 || || | C3 | +| \/ \/ C10 |___|| ||_| | +| C4 C4 _ _ | | ?? | +| -- -- | \/ || | | +| | || | | +| | || C1 | | +| | || | \/ _____| +| | C6 || | C9 | |___ +| | || | -- | BNC |___| +| | || | >C7| |_____| +| | || | | +| __ __ |____||_____| 1 2 3 6 | +|| ^ | >C4| |o|o|o|o|o|o| J2 >C4| | +|| | |o|o|o|o|o|o| | +|| C2 | >C4| >C4| | +|| | >C8| | +|| | 2 3 4 5 6 7 IRQ >C4| | +||_____| |o|o|o|o|o|o| J3 | +|_______ |o|o|o|o|o|o| _______________| + | | + |_____________________________________________| + +C1 -- "COM9026 + SMC 8638" + In a chip socket. + +C2 -- "@Copyright + Waterloo Microsystems Inc. + 1985" + In a chip Socket with info printed on a label covering a round window + showing the circuit inside. (The window indicates it is an EPROM chip.) + +C3 -- "COM9032 + SMC 8643" + In a chip socket. + +C4 -- "74LS" + 9 total no sockets. + +M5 -- "50006-136 + 20.000000 MHZ + MTQ-T1-S3 + 0 M-TRON 86-40" + Metallic case with 4 pins, no socket. + +C6 -- "MOSTEK@TC8643 + MK6116N-20 + MALAYSIA" + No socket. + +C7 -- No stamp or label but in a 20 pin chip socket. + +C8 -- "PAL10L8CN + 8623" + In a 20 pin socket. + +C9 -- "PAl16R4A-2CN + 8641" + In a 20 pin socket. + +C10 -- "M8640 + NMC + 9306N" + In an 8 pin socket. + +?? -- Some components on a smaller board and attached with 20 pins all + along the side closest to the BNC connector. The are coated in a dark + resin. + +On the board there are two jumper banks labeled J2 and J3. The +manufacturer didn't put a J1 on the board. The two boards I have both +came with a jumper box for each bank. + +J2 -- Numbered 1 2 3 4 5 6. + 4 and 5 are not stamped due to solder points. + +J3 -- IRQ 2 3 4 5 6 7 + +The board itself has a maple leaf stamped just above the irq jumpers +and "-2 46-86" beside C2. Between C1 and C6 "ASS 'Y 300163" and "@1986 +CORMAN CUSTOM ELECTRONICS CORP." stamped just below the BNC connector. +Below that "MADE IN CANADA" + + +***************************************************************************** + +** No Name ** +8-bit cards, 16-bit cards +------------------------- + - from Juergen Seifert + +NONAME 8-BIT ARCNET +=================== + +I have named this ARCnet card "NONAME", since there is no name of any +manufacturer on the Installation manual nor on the shipping box. The only +hint to the existence of a manufacturer at all is written in copper, +it is "Made in Taiwan" + +This description has been written by Juergen Seifert +using information from the Original + "ARCnet Installation Manual" + + + ________________________________________________________________ + | |STAR| BUS| T/P| | + | |____|____|____| | + | _____________________ | + | | | | + | | | | + | | | | + | | SMC | | + | | | | + | | COM90C65 | | + | | | | + | | | | + | |__________-__________| | + | _____| + | _______________ | CN | + | | PROM | |_____| + | > SOCKET | | + | |_______________| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | + | _______________ _______________ | + | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| | SW1 || SW2 || + | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| |_______________||_______________|| + |___ 2 3 4 5 7 E E R Node ID IOB__|__MEM____| + | \ IRQ / T T O | + |__________________1_2_M______________________| + +Legend: + +COM90C65: ARCnet Probe +S1 1-8: Node ID Select +S2 1-3: I/O Base Address Select + 4-6: Memory Base Address Select + 7-8: RAM Offset Select +ET1, ET2 Extended Timeout Select +ROM ROM Enable Select +CN RG62 Coax Connector +STAR| BUS | T/P Three fields for placing a sign (colored circle) + indicating the topology of the card + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in group SW1 are used to set the node ID. +Each node attached to the network must have an unique node ID which +must be different from 0. +Switch 8 serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 8 | 1 + 7 | 2 + 6 | 4 + 5 | 8 + 4 | 16 + 3 | 32 + 2 | 64 + 1 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch | Hex | Decimal + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | Node ID | Node ID + ----------------|---------|--------- + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 + . . . | | + 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 + . . . | | + 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 + . . . | | + 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The first three switches in switch group SW2 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + Switch | Hex I/O + 1 2 3 | Address + ------------|-------- + ON ON ON | 260 + ON ON OFF | 290 + ON OFF ON | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + ON OFF OFF | 2F0 + OFF ON ON | 300 + OFF ON OFF | 350 + OFF OFF ON | 380 + OFF OFF OFF | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer requires 2K of a 16K block of RAM. The base of this +16K block can be located in any of eight positions. +Switches 4-6 of switch group SW2 select the Base of the 16K block. +Within that 16K address space, the buffer may be assigned any one of four +positions, determined by the offset, switches 7 and 8 of group SW2. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 4 5 6 7 8 | Address | Address *) + -----------|---------|----------- + 0 0 0 0 0 | C0000 | C2000 + 0 0 0 0 1 | C0800 | C2000 + 0 0 0 1 0 | C1000 | C2000 + 0 0 0 1 1 | C1800 | C2000 + | | + 0 0 1 0 0 | C4000 | C6000 + 0 0 1 0 1 | C4800 | C6000 + 0 0 1 1 0 | C5000 | C6000 + 0 0 1 1 1 | C5800 | C6000 + | | + 0 1 0 0 0 | CC000 | CE000 + 0 1 0 0 1 | CC800 | CE000 + 0 1 0 1 0 | CD000 | CE000 + 0 1 0 1 1 | CD800 | CE000 + | | + 0 1 1 0 0 | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 1 0 1 | D0800 | D2000 + 0 1 1 1 0 | D1000 | D2000 + 0 1 1 1 1 | D1800 | D2000 + | | + 1 0 0 0 0 | D4000 | D6000 + 1 0 0 0 1 | D4800 | D6000 + 1 0 0 1 0 | D5000 | D6000 + 1 0 0 1 1 | D5800 | D6000 + | | + 1 0 1 0 0 | D8000 | DA000 + 1 0 1 0 1 | D8800 | DA000 + 1 0 1 1 0 | D9000 | DA000 + 1 0 1 1 1 | D9800 | DA000 + | | + 1 1 0 0 0 | DC000 | DE000 + 1 1 0 0 1 | DC800 | DE000 + 1 1 0 1 0 | DD000 | DE000 + 1 1 0 1 1 | DD800 | DE000 + | | + 1 1 1 0 0 | E0000 | E2000 + 1 1 1 0 1 | E0800 | E2000 + 1 1 1 1 0 | E1000 | E2000 + 1 1 1 1 1 | E1800 | E2000 + +*) To enable the 8K Boot PROM install the jumper ROM. + The default is jumper ROM not installed. + + +Setting Interrupt Request Lines (IRQ) +------------------------------------- + +To select a hardware interrupt level set one (only one!) of the jumpers +IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5 or IRQ7. The manufacturer's default is IRQ2. + + +Setting the Timeouts +-------------------- + +The two jumpers labeled ET1 and ET2 are used to determine the timeout +parameters (response and reconfiguration time). Every node in a network +must be set to the same timeout values. + + ET1 ET2 | Response Time (us) | Reconfiguration Time (ms) + --------|--------------------|-------------------------- + Off Off | 78 | 840 (Default) + Off On | 285 | 1680 + On Off | 563 | 1680 + On On | 1130 | 1680 + +On means jumper installed, Off means jumper not installed + + +NONAME 16-BIT ARCNET +==================== + +The manual of my 8-Bit NONAME ARCnet Card contains another description +of a 16-Bit Coax / Twisted Pair Card. This description is incomplete, +because there are missing two pages in the manual booklet. (The table +of contents reports pages ... 2-9, 2-11, 2-12, 3-1, ... but inside +the booklet there is a different way of counting ... 2-9, 2-10, A-1, +(empty page), 3-1, ..., 3-18, A-1 (again), A-2) +Also the picture of the board layout is not as good as the picture of +8-Bit card, because there isn't any letter like "SW1" written to the +picture. +Should somebody have such a board, please feel free to complete this +description or to send a mail to me! + +This description has been written by Juergen Seifert +using information from the Original + "ARCnet Installation Manual" + + + ___________________________________________________________________ + < _________________ _________________ | + > | SW? || SW? | | + < |_________________||_________________| | + > ____________________ | + < | | | + > | | | + < | | | + > | | | + < | | | + > | | | + < | | | + > |____________________| | + < ____| + > ____________________ | | + < | | | J1 | + > | < | | + < |____________________| ? ? ? ? ? ? |____| + > |o|o|o|o|o|o| | + < |o|o|o|o|o|o| | + > | + < __ ___________| + > | | | + <____________| |_______________________________________| + + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in group SW2 are used to set the node ID. +Each node attached to the network must have an unique node ID which +must be different from 0. +Switch 8 serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 8 | 1 + 7 | 2 + 6 | 4 + 5 | 8 + 4 | 16 + 3 | 32 + 2 | 64 + 1 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch | Hex | Decimal + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | Node ID | Node ID + ----------------|---------|--------- + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 + . . . | | + 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 + . . . | | + 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 + . . . | | + 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The first three switches in switch group SW1 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + Switch | Hex I/O + 3 2 1 | Address + ------------|-------- + ON ON ON | 260 + ON ON OFF | 290 + ON OFF ON | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + ON OFF OFF | 2F0 + OFF ON ON | 300 + OFF ON OFF | 350 + OFF OFF ON | 380 + OFF OFF OFF | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer requires 2K of a 16K block of RAM. The base of this +16K block can be located in any of eight positions. +Switches 6-8 of switch group SW1 select the Base of the 16K block. +Within that 16K address space, the buffer may be assigned any one of four +positions, determined by the offset, switches 4 and 5 of group SW1. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 8 7 6 5 4 | Address | Address + -----------|---------|----------- + 0 0 0 0 0 | C0000 | C2000 + 0 0 0 0 1 | C0800 | C2000 + 0 0 0 1 0 | C1000 | C2000 + 0 0 0 1 1 | C1800 | C2000 + | | + 0 0 1 0 0 | C4000 | C6000 + 0 0 1 0 1 | C4800 | C6000 + 0 0 1 1 0 | C5000 | C6000 + 0 0 1 1 1 | C5800 | C6000 + | | + 0 1 0 0 0 | CC000 | CE000 + 0 1 0 0 1 | CC800 | CE000 + 0 1 0 1 0 | CD000 | CE000 + 0 1 0 1 1 | CD800 | CE000 + | | + 0 1 1 0 0 | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 1 0 1 | D0800 | D2000 + 0 1 1 1 0 | D1000 | D2000 + 0 1 1 1 1 | D1800 | D2000 + | | + 1 0 0 0 0 | D4000 | D6000 + 1 0 0 0 1 | D4800 | D6000 + 1 0 0 1 0 | D5000 | D6000 + 1 0 0 1 1 | D5800 | D6000 + | | + 1 0 1 0 0 | D8000 | DA000 + 1 0 1 0 1 | D8800 | DA000 + 1 0 1 1 0 | D9000 | DA000 + 1 0 1 1 1 | D9800 | DA000 + | | + 1 1 0 0 0 | DC000 | DE000 + 1 1 0 0 1 | DC800 | DE000 + 1 1 0 1 0 | DD000 | DE000 + 1 1 0 1 1 | DD800 | DE000 + | | + 1 1 1 0 0 | E0000 | E2000 + 1 1 1 0 1 | E0800 | E2000 + 1 1 1 1 0 | E1000 | E2000 + 1 1 1 1 1 | E1800 | E2000 + + +Setting Interrupt Request Lines (IRQ) +------------------------------------- + +?????????????????????????????????????? + + +Setting the Timeouts +-------------------- + +?????????????????????????????????????? + + +***************************************************************************** + +** No Name ** +8-bit cards ("Made in Taiwan R.O.C.") +----------- + - from Vojtech Pavlik + +I have named this ARCnet card "NONAME", since I got only the card with +no manual at all and the only text identifying the manufacturer is +"MADE IN TAIWAN R.O.C" printed on the card. + + ____________________________________________________________ + | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | + | |o|o| JP1 o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| ON | + | + o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| ___| + | _____________ o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| OFF _____ | | ID7 + | | | SW1 | | | | ID6 + | > RAM (2k) | ____________________ | H | | S | ID5 + | |_____________| | || y | | W | ID4 + | | || b | | 2 | ID3 + | | || r | | | ID2 + | | || i | | | ID1 + | | 90C65 || d | |___| ID0 + | SW3 | || | | + | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| ON | || I | | + | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| | || C | | + | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| OFF |____________________|| | _____| + | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | | | |___ + | ______________ | | | BNC |___| + | | | |_____| |_____| + | > EPROM SOCKET | | + | |______________| | + | ______________| + | | + |_____________________________________________| + +Legend: + +90C65 ARCNET Chip +SW1 1-5: Base Memory Address Select + 6-8: Base I/O Address Select +SW2 1-8: Node ID Select (ID0-ID7) +SW3 1-5: IRQ Select + 6-7: Extra Timeout + 8 : ROM Enable +JP1 Led connector +BNC Coax connector + +Although the jumpers SW1 and SW3 are marked SW, not JP, they are jumpers, not +switches. + +Setting the jumpers to ON means connecting the upper two pins, off the bottom +two - or - in case of IRQ setting, connecting none of them at all. + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached +to the network must have an unique node ID which must not be 0. +Switch 1 (ID0) serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Label | Value + -------|-------|------- + 1 | ID0 | 1 + 2 | ID1 | 2 + 3 | ID2 | 4 + 4 | ID3 | 8 + 5 | ID4 | 16 + 6 | ID5 | 32 + 7 | ID6 | 64 + 8 | ID7 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch | Hex | Decimal + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID + ----------------|---------|--------- + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 + . . . | | + 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 + . . . | | + 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 + . . . | | + 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The last three switches in switch block SW1 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + + Switch | Hex I/O + 6 7 8 | Address + ------------|-------- + ON ON ON | 260 + OFF ON ON | 290 + ON OFF ON | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + OFF OFF ON | 2F0 + ON ON OFF | 300 + OFF ON OFF | 350 + ON OFF OFF | 380 + OFF OFF OFF | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be +located in any of eight positions. The address of the Boot Prom is +memory base + 0x2000. +Jumpers 3-5 of jumper block SW1 select the Memory Base address. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 1 2 3 4 5 | Address | Address *) + --------------------|---------|----------- + ON ON ON ON ON | C0000 | C2000 + ON ON OFF ON ON | C4000 | C6000 + ON ON ON OFF ON | CC000 | CE000 + ON ON OFF OFF ON | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + ON ON ON ON OFF | D4000 | D6000 + ON ON OFF ON OFF | D8000 | DA000 + ON ON ON OFF OFF | DC000 | DE000 + ON ON OFF OFF OFF | E0000 | E2000 + +*) To enable the Boot ROM set the jumper 8 of jumper block SW3 to position ON. + +The jumpers 1 and 2 probably add 0x0800, 0x1000 and 0x1800 to RAM adders. + +Setting the Interrupt Line +-------------------------- + +Jumpers 1-5 of the jumper block SW3 control the IRQ level. + + Jumper | IRQ + 1 2 3 4 5 | + ---------------------------- + ON OFF OFF OFF OFF | 2 + OFF ON OFF OFF OFF | 3 + OFF OFF ON OFF OFF | 4 + OFF OFF OFF ON OFF | 5 + OFF OFF OFF OFF ON | 7 + + +Setting the Timeout Parameters +------------------------------ + +The jumpers 6-7 of the jumper block SW3 are used to determine the timeout +parameters. These two jumpers are normally left in the OFF position. + + +***************************************************************************** + +** No Name ** +(Generic Model 9058) +-------------------- + - from Andrew J. Kroll + - Sorry this sat in my to-do box for so long, Andrew! (yikes - over a + year!) + _____ + | < + | .---' + ________________________________________________________________ | | + | | SW2 | | | + | ___________ |_____________| | | + | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 ___| | + | > 6116 RAM | _________ 8 | | | + | |___________| |20MHzXtal| 7 | | | + | |_________| __________ 6 | S | | + | 74LS373 | |- 5 | W | | + | _________ | E |- 4 | | | + | >_______| ______________|..... P |- 3 | 3 | | + | | | : O |- 2 | | | + | | | : X |- 1 |___| | + | ________________ | | : Y |- | | + | | SW1 | | SL90C65 | : |- | | + | |________________| | | : B |- | | + | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | | : O |- | | + | |_________o____|..../ A |- _______| | + | ____________________ | R |- | |------, + | | | | D |- | BNC | # | + | > 2764 PROM SOCKET | |__________|- |_______|------' + | |____________________| _________ | | + | >________| <- 74LS245 | | + | | | + |___ ______________| | + |H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H| | | + |U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U| | | + \| +Legend: + +SL90C65 ARCNET Controller / Transceiver /Logic +SW1 1-5: IRQ Select + 6: ET1 + 7: ET2 + 8: ROM ENABLE +SW2 1-3: Memory Buffer/PROM Address + 3-6: I/O Address Map +SW3 1-8: Node ID Select +BNC BNC RG62/U Connection + *I* have had success using RG59B/U with *NO* terminators! + What gives?! + +SW1: Timeouts, Interrupt and ROM +--------------------------------- + +To select a hardware interrupt level set one (only one!) of the dip switches +up (on) SW1...(switches 1-5) +IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ2. The Manufacturer's default is IRQ2. + +The switches on SW1 labeled EXT1 (switch 6) and EXT2 (switch 7) +are used to determine the timeout parameters. These two dip switches +are normally left off (down). + + To enable the 8K Boot PROM position SW1 switch 8 on (UP) labeled ROM. + The default is jumper ROM not installed. + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The last three switches in switch group SW2 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + + Switch | Hex I/O + 4 5 6 | Address + -------|-------- + 0 0 0 | 260 + 0 0 1 | 290 + 0 1 0 | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 1 | 2F0 + 1 0 0 | 300 + 1 0 1 | 350 + 1 1 0 | 380 + 1 1 1 | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory Address (RAM & ROM) +------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer requires 2K of a 16K block of RAM. The base of this +16K block can be located in any of eight positions. +Switches 1-3 of switch group SW2 select the Base of the 16K block. +(0 = DOWN, 1 = UP) +I could, however, only verify two settings... + + Switch| Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 1 2 3 | Address | Address + ------|---------|----------- + 0 0 0 | E0000 | E2000 + 0 0 1 | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 0 | ????? | ????? + 0 1 1 | ????? | ????? + 1 0 0 | ????? | ????? + 1 0 1 | ????? | ????? + 1 1 0 | ????? | ????? + 1 1 1 | ????? | ????? + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in group SW3 are used to set the node ID. +Each node attached to the network must have an unique node ID which +must be different from 0. +Switch 1 serves as the least significant bit (LSB). +switches in the DOWN position are OFF (0) and in the UP position are ON (1) + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 1 | 1 + 2 | 2 + 3 | 4 + 4 | 8 + 5 | 16 + 6 | 32 + 7 | 64 + 8 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch# | Hex | Decimal +8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID +----------------|---------|--------- +0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed <-. +0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 | +0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 | +0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 | + . . . | | | +0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 | + . . . | | + Don't use 0 or 255! +1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 | + . . . | | | +1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 | +1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 | +1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 <-' + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Tiara ** +(model unknown) +------------------------- + - from Christoph Lameter + + +Here is information about my card as far as I could figure it out: +----------------------------------------------- tiara +Tiara LanCard of Tiara Computer Systems. + ++----------------------------------------------+ +! ! Transmitter Unit ! ! +! +------------------+ ------- +! MEM Coax Connector +! ROM 7654321 <- I/O ------- +! : : +--------+ ! +! : : ! 90C66LJ! +++ +! : : ! ! !D Switch to set +! : : ! ! !I the Nodenumber +! : : +--------+ !P +! !++ +! 234567 <- IRQ ! ++------------!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!--------+ + !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! + +0 = Jumper Installed +1 = Open + +Top Jumper line Bit 7 = ROM Enable 654=Memory location 321=I/O + +Settings for Memory Location (Top Jumper Line) +456 Address selected +000 C0000 +001 C4000 +010 CC000 +011 D0000 +100 D4000 +101 D8000 +110 DC000 +111 E0000 + +Settings for I/O Address (Top Jumper Line) +123 Port +000 260 +001 290 +010 2E0 +011 2F0 +100 300 +101 350 +110 380 +111 3E0 + +Settings for IRQ Selection (Lower Jumper Line) +234567 +011111 IRQ 2 +101111 IRQ 3 +110111 IRQ 4 +111011 IRQ 5 +111110 IRQ 7 + +***************************************************************************** + + +Other Cards +----------- + +I have no information on other models of ARCnet cards at the moment. Please +send any and all info to: + apenwarr@worldvisions.ca + +Thanks. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt b/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..770fc41a78e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,555 @@ +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +NOTE: See also arcnet-hardware.txt in this directory for jumper-setting +and cabling information if you're like many of us and didn't happen to get a +manual with your ARCnet card. +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Since no one seems to listen to me otherwise, perhaps a poem will get your +attention: + This driver's getting fat and beefy, + But my cat is still named Fifi. + +Hmm, I think I'm allowed to call that a poem, even though it's only two +lines. Hey, I'm in Computer Science, not English. Give me a break. + +The point is: I REALLY REALLY REALLY REALLY REALLY want to hear from you if +you test this and get it working. Or if you don't. Or anything. + +ARCnet 0.32 ALPHA first made it into the Linux kernel 1.1.80 - this was +nice, but after that even FEWER people started writing to me because they +didn't even have to install the patch. + +Come on, be a sport! Send me a success report! + +(hey, that was even better than my original poem... this is getting bad!) + + +-------- +WARNING: +-------- + +If you don't e-mail me about your success/failure soon, I may be forced to +start SINGING. And we don't want that, do we? + +(You know, it might be argued that I'm pushing this point a little too much. +If you think so, why not flame me in a quick little e-mail? Please also +include the type of card(s) you're using, software, size of network, and +whether it's working or not.) + +My e-mail address is: apenwarr@worldvisions.ca + + +--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +These are the ARCnet drivers for Linux. + + +This new release (2.91) has been put together by David Woodhouse +, in an attempt to tidy up the driver after adding support +for yet another chipset. Now the generic support has been separated from the +individual chipset drivers, and the source files aren't quite so packed with +#ifdefs! I've changed this file a bit, but kept it in the first person from +Avery, because I didn't want to completely rewrite it. + +The previous release resulted from many months of on-and-off effort from me +(Avery Pennarun), many bug reports/fixes and suggestions from others, and in +particular a lot of input and coding from Tomasz Motylewski. Starting with +ARCnet 2.10 ALPHA, Tomasz's all-new-and-improved RFC1051 support has been +included and seems to be working fine! + + +Where do I discuss these drivers? +--------------------------------- + +Tomasz has been so kind as to set up a new and improved mailing list. +Subscribe by sending a message with the BODY "subscribe linux-arcnet YOUR +REAL NAME" to listserv@tichy.ch.uj.edu.pl. Then, to submit messages to the +list, mail to linux-arcnet@tichy.ch.uj.edu.pl. + +There are archives of the mailing list at: + http://tichy.ch.uj.edu.pl/lists/linux-arcnet + +The people on linux-net@vger.kernel.org have also been known to be very +helpful, especially when we're talking about ALPHA Linux kernels that may or +may not work right in the first place. + + +Other Drivers and Info +---------------------- + +You can try my ARCNET page on the World Wide Web at: + http://www.worldvisions.ca/~apenwarr/arcnet/ + +Also, SMC (one of the companies that makes ARCnet cards) has a WWW site you +might be interested in, which includes several drivers for various cards +including ARCnet. Try: + http://www.smc.com/ + +Performance Technologies makes various network software that supports +ARCnet: + http://www.perftech.com/ or ftp to ftp.perftech.com. + +Novell makes a networking stack for DOS which includes ARCnet drivers. Try +FTPing to ftp.novell.com. + +You can get the Crynwr packet driver collection (including arcether.com, the +one you'll want to use with ARCnet cards) from +oak.oakland.edu:/simtel/msdos/pktdrvr. It won't work perfectly on a 386+ +without patches, though, and also doesn't like several cards. Fixed +versions are available on my WWW page, or via e-mail if you don't have WWW +access. + + +Installing the Driver +--------------------- + +All you will need to do in order to install the driver is: + make config + (be sure to choose ARCnet in the network devices + and at least one chipset driver.) + make clean + make zImage + +If you obtained this ARCnet package as an upgrade to the ARCnet driver in +your current kernel, you will need to first copy arcnet.c over the one in +the linux/drivers/net directory. + +You will know the driver is installed properly if you get some ARCnet +messages when you reboot into the new Linux kernel. + +There are four chipset options: + + 1. Standard ARCnet COM90xx chipset. + +This is the normal ARCnet card, which you've probably got. This is the only +chipset driver which will autoprobe if not told where the card is. +It following options on the command line: + com90xx=[[,[,]]][,] | + +If you load the chipset support as a module, the options are: + io= irq= shmem= device= + +To disable the autoprobe, just specify "com90xx=" on the kernel command line. +To specify the name alone, but allow autoprobe, just put "com90xx=" + + 2. ARCnet COM20020 chipset. + +This is the new chipset from SMC with support for promiscuous mode (packet +sniffing), extra diagnostic information, etc. Unfortunately, there is no +sensible method of autoprobing for these cards. You must specify the I/O +address on the kernel command line. +The command line options are: + com20020=[,[,[,backplane[,CKP[,timeout]]]]][,name] + +If you load the chipset support as a module, the options are: + io= irq= node= backplane= clock= + timeout= device= + +The COM20020 chipset allows you to set the node ID in software, overriding the +default which is still set in DIP switches on the card. If you don't have the +COM20020 data sheets, and you don't know what the other three options refer +to, then they won't interest you - forget them. + + 3. ARCnet COM90xx chipset in IO-mapped mode. + +This will also work with the normal ARCnet cards, but doesn't use the shared +memory. It performs less well than the above driver, but is provided in case +you have a card which doesn't support shared memory, or (strangely) in case +you have so many ARCnet cards in your machine that you run out of shmem slots. +If you don't give the IO address on the kernel command line, then the driver +will not find the card. +The command line options are: + com90io=[,][,] + +If you load the chipset support as a module, the options are: + io= irq= device= + + 4. ARCnet RIM I cards. + +These are COM90xx chips which are _completely_ memory mapped. The support for +these is not tested. If you have one, please mail the author with a success +report. All options must be specified, except the device name. +Command line options: + arcrimi=,,[,] + +If you load the chipset support as a module, the options are: + shmem= irq= node= device= + + +Loadable Module Support +----------------------- + +Configure and rebuild Linux. When asked, answer 'm' to "Generic ARCnet +support" and to support for your ARCnet chipset if you want to use the +loadable module. You can also say 'y' to "Generic ARCnet support" and 'm' +to the chipset support if you wish. + + make config + make clean + make zImage + make modules + +If you're using a loadable module, you need to use insmod to load it, and +you can specify various characteristics of your card on the command +line. (In recent versions of the driver, autoprobing is much more reliable +and works as a module, so most of this is now unnecessary.) + +For example: + cd /usr/src/linux/modules + insmod arcnet.o + insmod com90xx.o + insmod com20020.o io=0x2e0 device=eth1 + + +Using the Driver +---------------- + +If you build your kernel with ARCnet COM90xx support included, it should +probe for your card automatically when you boot. If you use a different +chipset driver complied into the kernel, you must give the necessary options +on the kernel command line, as detailed above. + +Go read the NET-2-HOWTO and ETHERNET-HOWTO for Linux; they should be +available where you picked up this driver. Think of your ARCnet as a +souped-up (or down, as the case may be) Ethernet card. + +By the way, be sure to change all references from "eth0" to "arc0" in the +HOWTOs. Remember that ARCnet isn't a "true" Ethernet, and the device name +is DIFFERENT. + + +Multiple Cards in One Computer +------------------------------ + +Linux has pretty good support for this now, but since I've been busy, the +ARCnet driver has somewhat suffered in this respect. COM90xx support, if +compiled into the kernel, will (try to) autodetect all the installed cards. + +If you have other cards, with support compiled into the kernel, then you can +just repeat the options on the kernel command line, e.g.: +LILO: linux com20020=0x2e0 com20020=0x380 com90io=0x260 + +If you have the chipset support built as a loadable module, then you need to +do something like this: + insmod -o arc0 com90xx + insmod -o arc1 com20020 io=0x2e0 + insmod -o arc2 com90xx +The ARCnet drivers will now sort out their names automatically. + + +How do I get it to work with...? +-------------------------------- + +NFS: Should be fine linux->linux, just pretend you're using Ethernet cards. + oak.oakland.edu:/simtel/msdos/nfs has some nice DOS clients. There + is also a DOS-based NFS server called SOSS. It doesn't multitask + quite the way Linux does (actually, it doesn't multitask AT ALL) but + you never know what you might need. + + With AmiTCP (and possibly others), you may need to set the following + options in your Amiga nfstab: MD 1024 MR 1024 MW 1024 + (Thanks to Christian Gottschling + for this.) + + Probably these refer to maximum NFS data/read/write block sizes. I + don't know why the defaults on the Amiga didn't work; write to me if + you know more. + +DOS: If you're using the freeware arcether.com, you might want to install + the driver patch from my web page. It helps with PC/TCP, and also + can get arcether to load if it timed out too quickly during + initialization. In fact, if you use it on a 386+ you REALLY need + the patch, really. + +Windows: See DOS :) Trumpet Winsock works fine with either the Novell or + Arcether client, assuming you remember to load winpkt of course. + +LAN Manager and Windows for Workgroups: These programs use protocols that + are incompatible with the Internet standard. They try to pretend + the cards are Ethernet, and confuse everyone else on the network. + + However, v2.00 and higher of the Linux ARCnet driver supports this + protocol via the 'arc0e' device. See the section on "Multiprotocol + Support" for more information. + + Using the freeware Samba server and clients for Linux, you can now + interface quite nicely with TCP/IP-based WfWg or Lan Manager + networks. + +Windows 95: Tools are included with Win95 that let you use either the LANMAN + style network drivers (NDIS) or Novell drivers (ODI) to handle your + ARCnet packets. If you use ODI, you'll need to use the 'arc0' + device with Linux. If you use NDIS, then try the 'arc0e' device. + See the "Multiprotocol Support" section below if you need arc0e, + you're completely insane, and/or you need to build some kind of + hybrid network that uses both encapsulation types. + +OS/2: I've been told it works under Warp Connect with an ARCnet driver from + SMC. You need to use the 'arc0e' interface for this. If you get + the SMC driver to work with the TCP/IP stuff included in the + "normal" Warp Bonus Pack, let me know. + + ftp.microsoft.com also has a freeware "Lan Manager for OS/2" client + which should use the same protocol as WfWg does. I had no luck + installing it under Warp, however. Please mail me with any results. + +NetBSD/AmiTCP: These use an old version of the Internet standard ARCnet + protocol (RFC1051) which is compatible with the Linux driver v2.10 + ALPHA and above using the arc0s device. (See "Multiprotocol ARCnet" + below.) ** Newer versions of NetBSD apparently support RFC1201. + + +Using Multiprotocol ARCnet +-------------------------- + +The ARCnet driver v2.10 ALPHA supports three protocols, each on its own +"virtual network device": + + arc0 - RFC1201 protocol, the official Internet standard which just + happens to be 100% compatible with Novell's TRXNET driver. + Version 1.00 of the ARCnet driver supported _only_ this + protocol. arc0 is the fastest of the three protocols (for + whatever reason), and allows larger packets to be used + because it supports RFC1201 "packet splitting" operations. + Unless you have a specific need to use a different protocol, + I strongly suggest that you stick with this one. + + arc0e - "Ethernet-Encapsulation" which sends packets over ARCnet + that are actually a lot like Ethernet packets, including the + 6-byte hardware addresses. This protocol is compatible with + Microsoft's NDIS ARCnet driver, like the one in WfWg and + LANMAN. Because the MTU of 493 is actually smaller than the + one "required" by TCP/IP (576), there is a chance that some + network operations will not function properly. The Linux + TCP/IP layer can compensate in most cases, however, by + automatically fragmenting the TCP/IP packets to make them + fit. arc0e also works slightly more slowly than arc0, for + reasons yet to be determined. (Probably it's the smaller + MTU that does it.) + + arc0s - The "[s]imple" RFC1051 protocol is the "previous" Internet + standard that is completely incompatible with the new + standard. Some software today, however, continues to + support the old standard (and only the old standard) + including NetBSD and AmiTCP. RFC1051 also does not support + RFC1201's packet splitting, and the MTU of 507 is still + smaller than the Internet "requirement," so it's quite + possible that you may run into problems. It's also slower + than RFC1201 by about 25%, for the same reason as arc0e. + + The arc0s support was contributed by Tomasz Motylewski + and modified somewhat by me. Bugs are probably my fault. + +You can choose not to compile arc0e and arc0s into the driver if you want - +this will save you a bit of memory and avoid confusion when eg. trying to +use the "NFS-root" stuff in recent Linux kernels. + +The arc0e and arc0s devices are created automatically when you first +ifconfig the arc0 device. To actually use them, though, you need to also +ifconfig the other virtual devices you need. There are a number of ways you +can set up your network then: + + +1. Single Protocol. + + This is the simplest way to configure your network: use just one of the + two available protocols. As mentioned above, it's a good idea to use + only arc0 unless you have a good reason (like some other software, ie. + WfWg, that only works with arc0e). + + If you need only arc0, then the following commands should get you going: + ifconfig arc0 MY.IP.ADD.RESS + route add MY.IP.ADD.RESS arc0 + route add -net SUB.NET.ADD.RESS arc0 + [add other local routes here] + + If you need arc0e (and only arc0e), it's a little different: + ifconfig arc0 MY.IP.ADD.RESS + ifconfig arc0e MY.IP.ADD.RESS + route add MY.IP.ADD.RESS arc0e + route add -net SUB.NET.ADD.RESS arc0e + + arc0s works much the same way as arc0e. + + +2. More than one protocol on the same wire. + + Now things start getting confusing. To even try it, you may need to be + partly crazy. Here's what *I* did. :) Note that I don't include arc0s in + my home network; I don't have any NetBSD or AmiTCP computers, so I only + use arc0s during limited testing. + + I have three computers on my home network; two Linux boxes (which prefer + RFC1201 protocol, for reasons listed above), and one XT that can't run + Linux but runs the free Microsoft LANMAN Client instead. + + Worse, one of the Linux computers (freedom) also has a modem and acts as + a router to my Internet provider. The other Linux box (insight) also has + its own IP address and needs to use freedom as its default gateway. The + XT (patience), however, does not have its own Internet IP address and so + I assigned it one on a "private subnet" (as defined by RFC1597). + + To start with, take a simple network with just insight and freedom. + Insight needs to: + - talk to freedom via RFC1201 (arc0) protocol, because I like it + more and it's faster. + - use freedom as its Internet gateway. + + That's pretty easy to do. Set up insight like this: + ifconfig arc0 insight + route add insight arc0 + route add freedom arc0 /* I would use the subnet here (like I said + to to in "single protocol" above), + but the rest of the subnet + unfortunately lies across the PPP + link on freedom, which confuses + things. */ + route add default gw freedom + + And freedom gets configured like so: + ifconfig arc0 freedom + route add freedom arc0 + route add insight arc0 + /* and default gateway is configured by pppd */ + + Great, now insight talks to freedom directly on arc0, and sends packets + to the Internet through freedom. If you didn't know how to do the above, + you should probably stop reading this section now because it only gets + worse. + + Now, how do I add patience into the network? It will be using LANMAN + Client, which means I need the arc0e device. It needs to be able to talk + to both insight and freedom, and also use freedom as a gateway to the + Internet. (Recall that patience has a "private IP address" which won't + work on the Internet; that's okay, I configured Linux IP masquerading on + freedom for this subnet). + + So patience (necessarily; I don't have another IP number from my + provider) has an IP address on a different subnet than freedom and + insight, but needs to use freedom as an Internet gateway. Worse, most + DOS networking programs, including LANMAN, have braindead networking + schemes that rely completely on the netmask and a 'default gateway' to + determine how to route packets. This means that to get to freedom or + insight, patience WILL send through its default gateway, regardless of + the fact that both freedom and insight (courtesy of the arc0e device) + could understand a direct transmission. + + I compensate by giving freedom an extra IP address - aliased 'gatekeeper' + - that is on my private subnet, the same subnet that patience is on. I + then define gatekeeper to be the default gateway for patience. + + To configure freedom (in addition to the commands above): + ifconfig arc0e gatekeeper + route add gatekeeper arc0e + route add patience arc0e + + This way, freedom will send all packets for patience through arc0e, + giving its IP address as gatekeeper (on the private subnet). When it + talks to insight or the Internet, it will use its "freedom" Internet IP + address. + + You will notice that we haven't configured the arc0e device on insight. + This would work, but is not really necessary, and would require me to + assign insight another special IP number from my private subnet. Since + both insight and patience are using freedom as their default gateway, the + two can already talk to each other. + + It's quite fortunate that I set things up like this the first time (cough + cough) because it's really handy when I boot insight into DOS. There, it + runs the Novell ODI protocol stack, which only works with RFC1201 ARCnet. + In this mode it would be impossible for insight to communicate directly + with patience, since the Novell stack is incompatible with Microsoft's + Ethernet-Encap. Without changing any settings on freedom or patience, I + simply set freedom as the default gateway for insight (now in DOS, + remember) and all the forwarding happens "automagically" between the two + hosts that would normally not be able to communicate at all. + + For those who like diagrams, I have created two "virtual subnets" on the + same physical ARCnet wire. You can picture it like this: + + + [RFC1201 NETWORK] [ETHER-ENCAP NETWORK] + (registered Internet subnet) (RFC1597 private subnet) + + (IP Masquerade) + /---------------\ * /---------------\ + | | * | | + | +-Freedom-*-Gatekeeper-+ | + | | | * | | + \-------+-------/ | * \-------+-------/ + | | | + Insight | Patience + (Internet) + + + +It works: what now? +------------------- + +Send mail describing your setup, preferably including driver version, kernel +version, ARCnet card model, CPU type, number of systems on your network, and +list of software in use to me at the following address: + apenwarr@worldvisions.ca + +I do send (sometimes automated) replies to all messages I receive. My email +can be weird (and also usually gets forwarded all over the place along the +way to me), so if you don't get a reply within a reasonable time, please +resend. + + +It doesn't work: what now? +-------------------------- + +Do the same as above, but also include the output of the ifconfig and route +commands, as well as any pertinent log entries (ie. anything that starts +with "arcnet:" and has shown up since the last reboot) in your mail. + +If you want to try fixing it yourself (I strongly recommend that you mail me +about the problem first, since it might already have been solved) you may +want to try some of the debug levels available. For heavy testing on +D_DURING or more, it would be a REALLY good idea to kill your klogd daemon +first! D_DURING displays 4-5 lines for each packet sent or received. D_TX, +D_RX, and D_SKB actually DISPLAY each packet as it is sent or received, +which is obviously quite big. + +Starting with v2.40 ALPHA, the autoprobe routines have changed +significantly. In particular, they won't tell you why the card was not +found unless you turn on the D_INIT_REASONS debugging flag. + +Once the driver is running, you can run the arcdump shell script (available +from me or in the full ARCnet package, if you have it) as root to list the +contents of the arcnet buffers at any time. To make any sense at all out of +this, you should grab the pertinent RFCs. (some are listed near the top of +arcnet.c). arcdump assumes your card is at 0xD0000. If it isn't, edit the +script. + +Buffers 0 and 1 are used for receiving, and Buffers 2 and 3 are for sending. +Ping-pong buffers are implemented both ways. + +If your debug level includes D_DURING and you did NOT define SLOW_XMIT_COPY, +the buffers are cleared to a constant value of 0x42 every time the card is +reset (which should only happen when you do an ifconfig up, or when Linux +decides that the driver is broken). During a transmit, unused parts of the +buffer will be cleared to 0x42 as well. This is to make it easier to figure +out which bytes are being used by a packet. + +You can change the debug level without recompiling the kernel by typing: + ifconfig arc0 down metric 1xxx + /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1 +where "xxx" is the debug level you want. For example, "metric 1015" would put +you at debug level 15. Debug level 7 is currently the default. + +Note that the debug level is (starting with v1.90 ALPHA) a binary +combination of different debug flags; so debug level 7 is really 1+2+4 or +D_NORMAL+D_EXTRA+D_INIT. To include D_DURING, you would add 16 to this, +resulting in debug level 23. + +If you don't understand that, you probably don't want to know anyway. +E-mail me about your problem. + + +I want to send money: what now? +------------------------------- + +Go take a nap or something. You'll feel better in the morning. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/atm.txt b/Documentation/networking/atm.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..82921cee77fe --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/atm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +In order to use anything but the most primitive functions of ATM, +several user-mode programs are required to assist the kernel. These +programs and related material can be found via the ATM on Linux Web +page at http://linux-atm.sourceforge.net/ + +If you encounter problems with ATM, please report them on the ATM +on Linux mailing list. Subscription information, archives, etc., +can be found on http://linux-atm.sourceforge.net/ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ax25.txt b/Documentation/networking/ax25.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..37c25b0925f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ax25.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +To use the amateur radio protocols within Linux you will need to get a +suitable copy of the AX.25 Utilities. More detailed information about these +and associated programs can be found on http://zone.pspt.fi/~jsn/. + +For more information about the AX.25, NET/ROM and ROSE protocol stacks, see +the AX25-HOWTO written by Terry Dawson +who is also the AX.25 Utilities maintainer. + +There is an active mailing list for discussing Linux amateur radio matters +called linux-hams. To subscribe to it, send a message to +majordomo@vger.kernel.org with the words "subscribe linux-hams" in the body +of the message, the subject field is ignored. + +Jonathan G4KLX + +g4klx@g4klx.demon.co.uk diff --git a/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt b/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4e68849d5639 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + LINUX DRIVERS FOR BAYCOM MODEMS + + Thomas M. Sailer, HB9JNX/AE4WA, + +!!NEW!! (04/98) The drivers for the baycom modems have been split into +separate drivers as they did not share any code, and the driver +and device names have changed. + +This document describes the Linux Kernel Drivers for simple Baycom style +amateur radio modems. + +The following drivers are available: + +baycom_ser_fdx: + This driver supports the SER12 modems either full or half duplex. + Its baud rate may be changed via the `baud' module parameter, + therefore it supports just about every bit bang modem on a + serial port. Its devices are called bcsf0 through bcsf3. + This is the recommended driver for SER12 type modems, + however if you have a broken UART clone that does not have working + delta status bits, you may try baycom_ser_hdx. + +baycom_ser_hdx: + This is an alternative driver for SER12 type modems. + It only supports half duplex, and only 1200 baud. Its devices + are called bcsh0 through bcsh3. Use this driver only if baycom_ser_fdx + does not work with your UART. + +baycom_par: + This driver supports the par96 and picpar modems. + Its devices are called bcp0 through bcp3. + +baycom_epp: + This driver supports the EPP modem. + Its devices are called bce0 through bce3. + This driver is work-in-progress. + +The following modems are supported: + +ser12: This is a very simple 1200 baud AFSK modem. The modem consists only + of a modulator/demodulator chip, usually a TI TCM3105. The computer + is responsible for regenerating the receiver bit clock, as well as + for handling the HDLC protocol. The modem connects to a serial port, + hence the name. Since the serial port is not used as an async serial + port, the kernel driver for serial ports cannot be used, and this + driver only supports standard serial hardware (8250, 16450, 16550) + +par96: This is a modem for 9600 baud FSK compatible to the G3RUH standard. + The modem does all the filtering and regenerates the receiver clock. + Data is transferred from and to the PC via a shift register. + The shift register is filled with 16 bits and an interrupt is signalled. + The PC then empties the shift register in a burst. This modem connects + to the parallel port, hence the name. The modem leaves the + implementation of the HDLC protocol and the scrambler polynomial to + the PC. + +picpar: This is a redesign of the par96 modem by Henning Rech, DF9IC. The modem + is protocol compatible to par96, but uses only three low power ICs + and can therefore be fed from the parallel port and does not require + an additional power supply. Furthermore, it incorporates a carrier + detect circuitry. + +EPP: This is a high-speed modem adaptor that connects to an enhanced parallel port. + Its target audience is users working over a high speed hub (76.8kbit/s). + +eppfpga: This is a redesign of the EPP adaptor. + + + +All of the above modems only support half duplex communications. However, +the driver supports the KISS (see below) fullduplex command. It then simply +starts to send as soon as there's a packet to transmit and does not care +about DCD, i.e. it starts to send even if there's someone else on the channel. +This command is required by some implementations of the DAMA channel +access protocol. + + +The Interface of the drivers + +Unlike previous drivers, these drivers are no longer character devices, +but they are now true kernel network interfaces. Installation is therefore +simple. Once installed, four interfaces named bc{sf,sh,p,e}[0-3] are available. +sethdlc from the ax25 utilities may be used to set driver states etc. +Users of userland AX.25 stacks may use the net2kiss utility (also available +in the ax25 utilities package) to convert packets of a network interface +to a KISS stream on a pseudo tty. There's also a patch available from +me for WAMPES which allows attaching a kernel network interface directly. + + +Configuring the driver + +Every time a driver is inserted into the kernel, it has to know which +modems it should access at which ports. This can be done with the setbaycom +utility. If you are only using one modem, you can also configure the +driver from the insmod command line (or by means of an option line in +/etc/modprobe.conf). + +Examples: + modprobe baycom_ser_fdx mode="ser12*" iobase=0x3f8 irq=4 + sethdlc -i bcsf0 -p mode "ser12*" io 0x3f8 irq 4 + +Both lines configure the first port to drive a ser12 modem at the first +serial port (COM1 under DOS). The * in the mode parameter instructs the driver to use +the software DCD algorithm (see below). + + insmod baycom_par mode="picpar" iobase=0x378 + sethdlc -i bcp0 -p mode "picpar" io 0x378 + +Both lines configure the first port to drive a picpar modem at the +first parallel port (LPT1 under DOS). (Note: picpar implies +hardware DCD, par96 implies software DCD). + +The channel access parameters can be set with sethdlc -a or kissparms. +Note that both utilities interpret the values slightly differently. + + +Hardware DCD versus Software DCD + +To avoid collisions on the air, the driver must know when the channel is +busy. This is the task of the DCD circuitry/software. The driver may either +utilise a software DCD algorithm (options=1) or use a DCD signal from +the hardware (options=0). + +ser12: if software DCD is utilised, the radio's squelch should always be + open. It is highly recommended to use the software DCD algorithm, + as it is much faster than most hardware squelch circuitry. The + disadvantage is a slightly higher load on the system. + +par96: the software DCD algorithm for this type of modem is rather poor. + The modem simply does not provide enough information to implement + a reasonable DCD algorithm in software. Therefore, if your radio + feeds the DCD input of the PAR96 modem, the use of the hardware + DCD circuitry is recommended. + +picpar: the picpar modem features a builtin DCD hardware, which is highly + recommended. + + + +Compatibility with the rest of the Linux kernel + +The serial driver and the baycom serial drivers compete +for the same hardware resources. Of course only one driver can access a given +interface at a time. The serial driver grabs all interfaces it can find at +startup time. Therefore the baycom drivers subsequently won't be able to +access a serial port. You might therefore find it necessary to release +a port owned by the serial driver with 'setserial /dev/ttyS# uart none', where +# is the number of the interface. The baycom drivers do not reserve any +ports at startup, unless one is specified on the 'insmod' command line. Another +method to solve the problem is to compile all drivers as modules and +leave it to kmod to load the correct driver depending on the application. + +The parallel port drivers (baycom_par, baycom_epp) now use the parport subsystem +to arbitrate the ports between different client drivers. + +vy 73s de +Tom Sailer, sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch +hb9jnx @ hb9w.ampr.org diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0bc2ed136a38 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -0,0 +1,1618 @@ + + Linux Ethernet Bonding Driver HOWTO + +Initial release : Thomas Davis +Corrections, HA extensions : 2000/10/03-15 : + - Willy Tarreau + - Constantine Gavrilov + - Chad N. Tindel + - Janice Girouard + - Jay Vosburgh + +Reorganized and updated Feb 2005 by Jay Vosburgh + +Note : +------ + +The bonding driver originally came from Donald Becker's beowulf patches for +kernel 2.0. It has changed quite a bit since, and the original tools from +extreme-linux and beowulf sites will not work with this version of the driver. + +For new versions of the driver, patches for older kernels and the updated +userspace tools, please follow the links at the end of this file. + +Table of Contents +================= + +1. Bonding Driver Installation + +2. Bonding Driver Options + +3. Configuring Bonding Devices +3.1 Configuration with sysconfig support +3.2 Configuration with initscripts support +3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually +3.4 Configuring Multiple Bonds + +5. Querying Bonding Configuration +5.1 Bonding Configuration +5.2 Network Configuration + +6. Switch Configuration + +7. 802.1q VLAN Support + +8. Link Monitoring +8.1 ARP Monitor Operation +8.2 Configuring Multiple ARP Targets +8.3 MII Monitor Operation + +9. Potential Trouble Sources +9.1 Adventures in Routing +9.2 Ethernet Device Renaming +9.3 Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon + +10. SNMP agents + +11. Promiscuous mode + +12. High Availability Information +12.1 High Availability in a Single Switch Topology +12.1.1 Bonding Mode Selection for Single Switch Topology +12.1.2 Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology +12.2 High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology +12.2.1 Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology +12.2.2 Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology +12.3 Switch Behavior Issues for High Availability + +13. Hardware Specific Considerations +13.1 IBM BladeCenter + +14. Frequently Asked Questions + +15. Resources and Links + + +1. Bonding Driver Installation +============================== + + Most popular distro kernels ship with the bonding driver +already available as a module and the ifenslave user level control +program installed and ready for use. If your distro does not, or you +have need to compile bonding from source (e.g., configuring and +installing a mainline kernel from kernel.org), you'll need to perform +the following steps: + +1.1 Configure and build the kernel with bonding +----------------------------------------------- + + The latest version of the bonding driver is available in the +drivers/net/bonding subdirectory of the most recent kernel source +(which is available on http://kernel.org). + + Prior to the 2.4.11 kernel, the bonding driver was maintained +largely outside the kernel tree; patches for some earlier kernels are +available on the bonding sourceforge site, although those patches are +still several years out of date. Most users will want to use either +the most recent kernel from kernel.org or whatever kernel came with +their distro. + + Configure kernel with "make menuconfig" (or "make xconfig" or +"make config"), then select "Bonding driver support" in the "Network +device support" section. It is recommended that you configure the +driver as module since it is currently the only way to pass parameters +to the driver or configure more than one bonding device. + + Build and install the new kernel and modules, then proceed to +step 2. + +1.2 Install ifenslave Control Utility +------------------------------------- + + The ifenslave user level control program is included in the +kernel source tree, in the file Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c. +It is generally recommended that you use the ifenslave that +corresponds to the kernel that you are using (either from the same +source tree or supplied with the distro), however, ifenslave +executables from older kernels should function (but features newer +than the ifenslave release are not supported). Running an ifenslave +that is newer than the kernel is not supported, and may or may not +work. + + To install ifenslave, do the following: + +# gcc -Wall -O -I/usr/src/linux/include ifenslave.c -o ifenslave +# cp ifenslave /sbin/ifenslave + + If your kernel source is not in "/usr/src/linux," then replace +"/usr/src/linux/include" in the above with the location of your kernel +source include directory. + + You may wish to back up any existing /sbin/ifenslave, or, for +testing or informal use, tag the ifenslave to the kernel version +(e.g., name the ifenslave executable /sbin/ifenslave-2.6.10). + +IMPORTANT NOTE: + + If you omit the "-I" or specify an incorrect directory, you +may end up with an ifenslave that is incompatible with the kernel +you're trying to build it for. Some distros (e.g., Red Hat from 7.1 +onwards) do not have /usr/include/linux symbolically linked to the +default kernel source include directory. + + +2. Bonding Driver Options +========================= + + Options for the bonding driver are supplied as parameters to +the bonding module at load time. They may be given as command line +arguments to the insmod or modprobe command, but are usually specified +in either the /etc/modprobe.conf configuration file, or in a +distro-specific configuration file (some of which are detailed in the +next section). + + The available bonding driver parameters are listed below. If a +parameter is not specified the default value is used. When initially +configuring a bond, it is recommended "tail -f /var/log/messages" be +run in a separate window to watch for bonding driver error messages. + + It is critical that either the miimon or arp_interval and +arp_ip_target parameters be specified, otherwise serious network +degradation will occur during link failures. Very few devices do not +support at least miimon, so there is really no reason not to use it. + + Options with textual values will accept either the text name + or, for backwards compatibility, the option value. E.g., + "mode=802.3ad" and "mode=4" set the same mode. + + The parameters are as follows: + +arp_interval + + Specifies the ARP monitoring frequency in milli-seconds. If + ARP monitoring is used in a load-balancing mode (mode 0 or 2), + the switch should be configured in a mode that evenly + distributes packets across all links - such as round-robin. If + the switch is configured to distribute the packets in an XOR + fashion, all replies from the ARP targets will be received on + the same link which could cause the other team members to + fail. ARP monitoring should not be used in conjunction with + miimon. A value of 0 disables ARP monitoring. The default + value is 0. + +arp_ip_target + + Specifies the ip addresses to use when arp_interval is > 0. + These are the targets of the ARP request sent to determine the + health of the link to the targets. Specify these values in + ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd format. Multiple ip adresses must be + seperated by a comma. At least one IP address must be given + for ARP monitoring to function. The maximum number of targets + that can be specified is 16. The default value is no IP + addresses. + +downdelay + + Specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait before disabling + a slave after a link failure has been detected. This option + is only valid for the miimon link monitor. The downdelay + value should be a multiple of the miimon value; if not, it + will be rounded down to the nearest multiple. The default + value is 0. + +lacp_rate + + Option specifying the rate in which we'll ask our link partner + to transmit LACPDU packets in 802.3ad mode. Possible values + are: + + slow or 0 + Request partner to transmit LACPDUs every 30 seconds (default) + + fast or 1 + Request partner to transmit LACPDUs every 1 second + +max_bonds + + Specifies the number of bonding devices to create for this + instance of the bonding driver. E.g., if max_bonds is 3, and + the bonding driver is not already loaded, then bond0, bond1 + and bond2 will be created. The default value is 1. + +miimon + + Specifies the frequency in milli-seconds that MII link + monitoring will occur. A value of zero disables MII link + monitoring. A value of 100 is a good starting point. The + use_carrier option, below, affects how the link state is + determined. See the High Availability section for additional + information. The default value is 0. + +mode + + Specifies one of the bonding policies. The default is + balance-rr (round robin). Possible values are: + + balance-rr or 0 + + Round-robin policy: Transmit packets in sequential + order from the first available slave through the + last. This mode provides load balancing and fault + tolerance. + + active-backup or 1 + + Active-backup policy: Only one slave in the bond is + active. A different slave becomes active if, and only + if, the active slave fails. The bond's MAC address is + externally visible on only one port (network adapter) + to avoid confusing the switch. This mode provides + fault tolerance. The primary option affects the + behavior of this mode. + + balance-xor or 2 + + XOR policy: Transmit based on [(source MAC address + XOR'd with destination MAC address) modulo slave + count]. This selects the same slave for each + destination MAC address. This mode provides load + balancing and fault tolerance. + + broadcast or 3 + + Broadcast policy: transmits everything on all slave + interfaces. This mode provides fault tolerance. + + 802.3ad or 4 + + IEEE 802.3ad Dynamic link aggregation. Creates + aggregation groups that share the same speed and + duplex settings. Utilizes all slaves in the active + aggregator according to the 802.3ad specification. + + Pre-requisites: + + 1. Ethtool support in the base drivers for retrieving + the speed and duplex of each slave. + + 2. A switch that supports IEEE 802.3ad Dynamic link + aggregation. + + Most switches will require some type of configuration + to enable 802.3ad mode. + + balance-tlb or 5 + + Adaptive transmit load balancing: channel bonding that + does not require any special switch support. The + outgoing traffic is distributed according to the + current load (computed relative to the speed) on each + slave. Incoming traffic is received by the current + slave. If the receiving slave fails, another slave + takes over the MAC address of the failed receiving + slave. + + Prerequisite: + + Ethtool support in the base drivers for retrieving the + speed of each slave. + + balance-alb or 6 + + Adaptive load balancing: includes balance-tlb plus + receive load balancing (rlb) for IPV4 traffic, and + does not require any special switch support. The + receive load balancing is achieved by ARP negotiation. + The bonding driver intercepts the ARP Replies sent by + the local system on their way out and overwrites the + source hardware address with the unique hardware + address of one of the slaves in the bond such that + different peers use different hardware addresses for + the server. + + Receive traffic from connections created by the server + is also balanced. When the local system sends an ARP + Request the bonding driver copies and saves the peer's + IP information from the ARP packet. When the ARP + Reply arrives from the peer, its hardware address is + retrieved and the bonding driver initiates an ARP + reply to this peer assigning it to one of the slaves + in the bond. A problematic outcome of using ARP + negotiation for balancing is that each time that an + ARP request is broadcast it uses the hardware address + of the bond. Hence, peers learn the hardware address + of the bond and the balancing of receive traffic + collapses to the current slave. This is handled by + sending updates (ARP Replies) to all the peers with + their individually assigned hardware address such that + the traffic is redistributed. Receive traffic is also + redistributed when a new slave is added to the bond + and when an inactive slave is re-activated. The + receive load is distributed sequentially (round robin) + among the group of highest speed slaves in the bond. + + When a link is reconnected or a new slave joins the + bond the receive traffic is redistributed among all + active slaves in the bond by intiating ARP Replies + with the selected mac address to each of the + clients. The updelay parameter (detailed below) must + be set to a value equal or greater than the switch's + forwarding delay so that the ARP Replies sent to the + peers will not be blocked by the switch. + + Prerequisites: + + 1. Ethtool support in the base drivers for retrieving + the speed of each slave. + + 2. Base driver support for setting the hardware + address of a device while it is open. This is + required so that there will always be one slave in the + team using the bond hardware address (the + curr_active_slave) while having a unique hardware + address for each slave in the bond. If the + curr_active_slave fails its hardware address is + swapped with the new curr_active_slave that was + chosen. + +primary + + A string (eth0, eth2, etc) specifying which slave is the + primary device. The specified device will always be the + active slave while it is available. Only when the primary is + off-line will alternate devices be used. This is useful when + one slave is preferred over another, e.g., when one slave has + higher throughput than another. + + The primary option is only valid for active-backup mode. + +updelay + + Specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait before enabling a + slave after a link recovery has been detected. This option is + only valid for the miimon link monitor. The updelay value + should be a multiple of the miimon value; if not, it will be + rounded down to the nearest multiple. The default value is 0. + +use_carrier + + Specifies whether or not miimon should use MII or ETHTOOL + ioctls vs. netif_carrier_ok() to determine the link + status. The MII or ETHTOOL ioctls are less efficient and + utilize a deprecated calling sequence within the kernel. The + netif_carrier_ok() relies on the device driver to maintain its + state with netif_carrier_on/off; at this writing, most, but + not all, device drivers support this facility. + + If bonding insists that the link is up when it should not be, + it may be that your network device driver does not support + netif_carrier_on/off. The default state for netif_carrier is + "carrier on," so if a driver does not support netif_carrier, + it will appear as if the link is always up. In this case, + setting use_carrier to 0 will cause bonding to revert to the + MII / ETHTOOL ioctl method to determine the link state. + + A value of 1 enables the use of netif_carrier_ok(), a value of + 0 will use the deprecated MII / ETHTOOL ioctls. The default + value is 1. + + + +3. Configuring Bonding Devices +============================== + + There are, essentially, two methods for configuring bonding: +with support from the distro's network initialization scripts, and +without. Distros generally use one of two packages for the network +initialization scripts: initscripts or sysconfig. Recent versions of +these packages have support for bonding, while older versions do not. + + We will first describe the options for configuring bonding for +distros using versions of initscripts and sysconfig with full or +partial support for bonding, then provide information on enabling +bonding without support from the network initialization scripts (i.e., +older versions of initscripts or sysconfig). + + If you're unsure whether your distro uses sysconfig or +initscripts, or don't know if it's new enough, have no fear. +Determining this is fairly straightforward. + + First, issue the command: + +$ rpm -qf /sbin/ifup + + It will respond with a line of text starting with either +"initscripts" or "sysconfig," followed by some numbers. This is the +package that provides your network initialization scripts. + + Next, to determine if your installation supports bonding, +issue the command: + +$ grep ifenslave /sbin/ifup + + If this returns any matches, then your initscripts or +sysconfig has support for bonding. + +3.1 Configuration with sysconfig support +---------------------------------------- + + This section applies to distros using a version of sysconfig +with bonding support, for example, SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9. + + SuSE SLES 9's networking configuration system does support +bonding, however, at this writing, the YaST system configuration +frontend does not provide any means to work with bonding devices. +Bonding devices can be managed by hand, however, as follows. + + First, if they have not already been configured, configure the +slave devices. On SLES 9, this is most easily done by running the +yast2 sysconfig configuration utility. The goal is for to create an +ifcfg-id file for each slave device. The simplest way to accomplish +this is to configure the devices for DHCP. The name of the +configuration file for each device will be of the form: + +ifcfg-id-xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx + + Where the "xx" portion will be replaced with the digits from +the device's permanent MAC address. + + Once the set of ifcfg-id-xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx files has been +created, it is necessary to edit the configuration files for the slave +devices (the MAC addresses correspond to those of the slave devices). +Before editing, the file will contain muliple lines, and will look +something like this: + +BOOTPROTO='dhcp' +STARTMODE='on' +USERCTL='no' +UNIQUE='XNzu.WeZGOGF+4wE' +_nm_name='bus-pci-0001:61:01.0' + + Change the BOOTPROTO and STARTMODE lines to the following: + +BOOTPROTO='none' +STARTMODE='off' + + Do not alter the UNIQUE or _nm_name lines. Remove any other +lines (USERCTL, etc). + + Once the ifcfg-id-xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx files have been modified, +it's time to create the configuration file for the bonding device +itself. This file is named ifcfg-bondX, where X is the number of the +bonding device to create, starting at 0. The first such file is +ifcfg-bond0, the second is ifcfg-bond1, and so on. The sysconfig +network configuration system will correctly start multiple instances +of bonding. + + The contents of the ifcfg-bondX file is as follows: + +BOOTPROTO="static" +BROADCAST="10.0.2.255" +IPADDR="10.0.2.10" +NETMASK="255.255.0.0" +NETWORK="10.0.2.0" +REMOTE_IPADDR="" +STARTMODE="onboot" +BONDING_MASTER="yes" +BONDING_MODULE_OPTS="mode=active-backup miimon=100" +BONDING_SLAVE0="eth0" +BONDING_SLAVE1="eth1" + + Replace the sample BROADCAST, IPADDR, NETMASK and NETWORK +values with the appropriate values for your network. + + Note that configuring the bonding device with BOOTPROTO='dhcp' +does not work; the scripts attempt to obtain the device address from +DHCP prior to adding any of the slave devices. Without active slaves, +the DHCP requests are not sent to the network. + + The STARTMODE specifies when the device is brought online. +The possible values are: + + onboot: The device is started at boot time. If you're not + sure, this is probably what you want. + + manual: The device is started only when ifup is called + manually. Bonding devices may be configured this + way if you do not wish them to start automatically + at boot for some reason. + + hotplug: The device is started by a hotplug event. This is not + a valid choice for a bonding device. + + off or ignore: The device configuration is ignored. + + The line BONDING_MASTER='yes' indicates that the device is a +bonding master device. The only useful value is "yes." + + The contents of BONDING_MODULE_OPTS are supplied to the +instance of the bonding module for this device. Specify the options +for the bonding mode, link monitoring, and so on here. Do not include +the max_bonds bonding parameter; this will confuse the configuration +system if you have multiple bonding devices. + + Finally, supply one BONDING_SLAVEn="ethX" for each slave, +where "n" is an increasing value, one for each slave, and "ethX" is +the name of the slave device (eth0, eth1, etc). + + When all configuration files have been modified or created, +networking must be restarted for the configuration changes to take +effect. This can be accomplished via the following: + +# /etc/init.d/network restart + + Note that the network control script (/sbin/ifdown) will +remove the bonding module as part of the network shutdown processing, +so it is not necessary to remove the module by hand if, e.g., the +module paramters have changed. + + Also, at this writing, YaST/YaST2 will not manage bonding +devices (they do not show bonding interfaces on its list of network +devices). It is necessary to edit the configuration file by hand to +change the bonding configuration. + + Additional general options and details of the ifcfg file +format can be found in an example ifcfg template file: + +/etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg.template + + Note that the template does not document the various BONDING_ +settings described above, but does describe many of the other options. + +3.2 Configuration with initscripts support +------------------------------------------ + + This section applies to distros using a version of initscripts +with bonding support, for example, Red Hat Linux 9 or Red Hat +Enterprise Linux version 3. On these systems, the network +initialization scripts have some knowledge of bonding, and can be +configured to control bonding devices. + + These distros will not automatically load the network adapter +driver unless the ethX device is configured with an IP address. +Because of this constraint, users must manually configure a +network-script file for all physical adapters that will be members of +a bondX link. Network script files are located in the directory: + +/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts + + The file name must be prefixed with "ifcfg-eth" and suffixed +with the adapter's physical adapter number. For example, the script +for eth0 would be named /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth0. +Place the following text in the file: + +DEVICE=eth0 +USERCTL=no +ONBOOT=yes +MASTER=bond0 +SLAVE=yes +BOOTPROTO=none + + The DEVICE= line will be different for every ethX device and +must correspond with the name of the file, i.e., ifcfg-eth1 must have +a device line of DEVICE=eth1. The setting of the MASTER= line will +also depend on the final bonding interface name chosen for your bond. +As with other network devices, these typically start at 0, and go up +one for each device, i.e., the first bonding instance is bond0, the +second is bond1, and so on. + + Next, create a bond network script. The file name for this +script will be /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-bondX where X is +the number of the bond. For bond0 the file is named "ifcfg-bond0", +for bond1 it is named "ifcfg-bond1", and so on. Within that file, +place the following text: + +DEVICE=bond0 +IPADDR=192.168.1.1 +NETMASK=255.255.255.0 +NETWORK=192.168.1.0 +BROADCAST=192.168.1.255 +ONBOOT=yes +BOOTPROTO=none +USERCTL=no + + Be sure to change the networking specific lines (IPADDR, +NETMASK, NETWORK and BROADCAST) to match your network configuration. + + Finally, it is necessary to edit /etc/modules.conf to load the +bonding module when the bond0 interface is brought up. The following +sample lines in /etc/modules.conf will load the bonding module, and +select its options: + +alias bond0 bonding +options bond0 mode=balance-alb miimon=100 + + Replace the sample parameters with the appropriate set of +options for your configuration. + + Finally run "/etc/rc.d/init.d/network restart" as root. This +will restart the networking subsystem and your bond link should be now +up and running. + + +3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually +-------------------------------- + + This section applies to distros whose network initialization +scripts (the sysconfig or initscripts package) do not have specific +knowledge of bonding. One such distro is SuSE Linux Enterprise Server +version 8. + + The general methodology for these systems is to place the +bonding module parameters into /etc/modprobe.conf, then add modprobe +and/or ifenslave commands to the system's global init script. The +name of the global init script differs; for sysconfig, it is +/etc/init.d/boot.local and for initscripts it is /etc/rc.d/rc.local. + + For example, if you wanted to make a simple bond of two e100 +devices (presumed to be eth0 and eth1), and have it persist across +reboots, edit the appropriate file (/etc/init.d/boot.local or +/etc/rc.d/rc.local), and add the following: + +modprobe bonding -obond0 mode=balance-alb miimon=100 +modprobe e100 +ifconfig bond0 192.168.1.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 up +ifenslave bond0 eth0 +ifenslave bond0 eth1 + + Replace the example bonding module parameters and bond0 +network configuration (IP address, netmask, etc) with the appropriate +values for your configuration. The above example loads the bonding +module with the name "bond0," this simplifies the naming if multiple +bonding modules are loaded (each successive instance of the module is +given a different name, and the module instance names match the +bonding interface names). + + Unfortunately, this method will not provide support for the +ifup and ifdown scripts on the bond devices. To reload the bonding +configuration, it is necessary to run the initialization script, e.g., + +# /etc/init.d/boot.local + + or + +# /etc/rc.d/rc.local + + It may be desirable in such a case to create a separate script +which only initializes the bonding configuration, then call that +separate script from within boot.local. This allows for bonding to be +enabled without re-running the entire global init script. + + To shut down the bonding devices, it is necessary to first +mark the bonding device itself as being down, then remove the +appropriate device driver modules. For our example above, you can do +the following: + +# ifconfig bond0 down +# rmmod bond0 +# rmmod e100 + + Again, for convenience, it may be desirable to create a script +with these commands. + + +3.4 Configuring Multiple Bonds +------------------------------ + + This section contains information on configuring multiple +bonding devices with differing options. If you require multiple +bonding devices, but all with the same options, see the "max_bonds" +module paramter, documented above. + + To create multiple bonding devices with differing options, it +is necessary to load the bonding driver multiple times. Note that +current versions of the sysconfig network initialization scripts +handle this automatically; if your distro uses these scripts, no +special action is needed. See the section Configuring Bonding +Devices, above, if you're not sure about your network initialization +scripts. + + To load multiple instances of the module, it is necessary to +specify a different name for each instance (the module loading system +requires that every loaded module, even multiple instances of the same +module, have a unique name). This is accomplished by supplying +multiple sets of bonding options in /etc/modprobe.conf, for example: + +alias bond0 bonding +options bond0 -o bond0 mode=balance-rr miimon=100 + +alias bond1 bonding +options bond1 -o bond1 mode=balance-alb miimon=50 + + will load the bonding module two times. The first instance is +named "bond0" and creates the bond0 device in balance-rr mode with an +miimon of 100. The second instance is named "bond1" and creates the +bond1 device in balance-alb mode with an miimon of 50. + + This may be repeated any number of times, specifying a new and +unique name in place of bond0 or bond1 for each instance. + + When the appropriate module paramters are in place, then +configure bonding according to the instructions for your distro. + +5. Querying Bonding Configuration +================================= + +5.1 Bonding Configuration +------------------------- + + Each bonding device has a read-only file residing in the +/proc/net/bonding directory. The file contents include information +about the bonding configuration, options and state of each slave. + + For example, the contents of /proc/net/bonding/bond0 after the +driver is loaded with parameters of mode=0 and miimon=1000 is +generally as follows: + + Ethernet Channel Bonding Driver: 2.6.1 (October 29, 2004) + Bonding Mode: load balancing (round-robin) + Currently Active Slave: eth0 + MII Status: up + MII Polling Interval (ms): 1000 + Up Delay (ms): 0 + Down Delay (ms): 0 + + Slave Interface: eth1 + MII Status: up + Link Failure Count: 1 + + Slave Interface: eth0 + MII Status: up + Link Failure Count: 1 + + The precise format and contents will change depending upon the +bonding configuration, state, and version of the bonding driver. + +5.2 Network configuration +------------------------- + + The network configuration can be inspected using the ifconfig +command. Bonding devices will have the MASTER flag set; Bonding slave +devices will have the SLAVE flag set. The ifconfig output does not +contain information on which slaves are associated with which masters. + + In the example below, the bond0 interface is the master +(MASTER) while eth0 and eth1 are slaves (SLAVE). Notice all slaves of +bond0 have the same MAC address (HWaddr) as bond0 for all modes except +TLB and ALB that require a unique MAC address for each slave. + +# /sbin/ifconfig +bond0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4 + inet addr:XXX.XXX.XXX.YYY Bcast:XXX.XXX.XXX.255 Mask:255.255.252.0 + UP BROADCAST RUNNING MASTER MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 + RX packets:7224794 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 + TX packets:3286647 errors:1 dropped:0 overruns:1 carrier:0 + collisions:0 txqueuelen:0 + +eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4 + inet addr:XXX.XXX.XXX.YYY Bcast:XXX.XXX.XXX.255 Mask:255.255.252.0 + UP BROADCAST RUNNING SLAVE MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 + RX packets:3573025 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 + TX packets:1643167 errors:1 dropped:0 overruns:1 carrier:0 + collisions:0 txqueuelen:100 + Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1080 + +eth1 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4 + inet addr:XXX.XXX.XXX.YYY Bcast:XXX.XXX.XXX.255 Mask:255.255.252.0 + UP BROADCAST RUNNING SLAVE MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 + RX packets:3651769 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 + TX packets:1643480 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 + collisions:0 txqueuelen:100 + Interrupt:9 Base address:0x1400 + +6. Switch Configuration +======================= + + For this section, "switch" refers to whatever system the +bonded devices are directly connected to (i.e., where the other end of +the cable plugs into). This may be an actual dedicated switch device, +or it may be another regular system (e.g., another computer running +Linux), + + The active-backup, balance-tlb and balance-alb modes do not +require any specific configuration of the switch. + + The 802.3ad mode requires that the switch have the appropriate +ports configured as an 802.3ad aggregation. The precise method used +to configure this varies from switch to switch, but, for example, a +Cisco 3550 series switch requires that the appropriate ports first be +grouped together in a single etherchannel instance, then that +etherchannel is set to mode "lacp" to enable 802.3ad (instead of +standard EtherChannel). + + The balance-rr, balance-xor and broadcast modes generally +require that the switch have the appropriate ports grouped together. +The nomenclature for such a group differs between switches, it may be +called an "etherchannel" (as in the Cisco example, above), a "trunk +group" or some other similar variation. For these modes, each switch +will also have its own configuration options for the switch's transmit +policy to the bond. Typical choices include XOR of either the MAC or +IP addresses. The transmit policy of the two peers does not need to +match. For these three modes, the bonding mode really selects a +transmit policy for an EtherChannel group; all three will interoperate +with another EtherChannel group. + + +7. 802.1q VLAN Support +====================== + + It is possible to configure VLAN devices over a bond interface +using the 8021q driver. However, only packets coming from the 8021q +driver and passing through bonding will be tagged by default. Self +generated packets, for example, bonding's learning packets or ARP +packets generated by either ALB mode or the ARP monitor mechanism, are +tagged internally by bonding itself. As a result, bonding must +"learn" the VLAN IDs configured above it, and use those IDs to tag +self generated packets. + + For reasons of simplicity, and to support the use of adapters +that can do VLAN hardware acceleration offloding, the bonding +interface declares itself as fully hardware offloaing capable, it gets +the add_vid/kill_vid notifications to gather the necessary +information, and it propagates those actions to the slaves. In case +of mixed adapter types, hardware accelerated tagged packets that +should go through an adapter that is not offloading capable are +"un-accelerated" by the bonding driver so the VLAN tag sits in the +regular location. + + VLAN interfaces *must* be added on top of a bonding interface +only after enslaving at least one slave. The bonding interface has a +hardware address of 00:00:00:00:00:00 until the first slave is added. +If the VLAN interface is created prior to the first enslavement, it +would pick up the all-zeroes hardware address. Once the first slave +is attached to the bond, the bond device itself will pick up the +slave's hardware address, which is then available for the VLAN device. + + Also, be aware that a similar problem can occur if all slaves +are released from a bond that still has one or more VLAN interfaces on +top of it. When a new slave is added, the bonding interface will +obtain its hardware address from the first slave, which might not +match the hardware address of the VLAN interfaces (which was +ultimately copied from an earlier slave). + + There are two methods to insure that the VLAN device operates +with the correct hardware address if all slaves are removed from a +bond interface: + + 1. Remove all VLAN interfaces then recreate them + + 2. Set the bonding interface's hardware address so that it +matches the hardware address of the VLAN interfaces. + + Note that changing a VLAN interface's HW address would set the +underlying device -- i.e. the bonding interface -- to promiscouos +mode, which might not be what you want. + + +8. Link Monitoring +================== + + The bonding driver at present supports two schemes for +monitoring a slave device's link state: the ARP monitor and the MII +monitor. + + At the present time, due to implementation restrictions in the +bonding driver itself, it is not possible to enable both ARP and MII +monitoring simultaneously. + +8.1 ARP Monitor Operation +------------------------- + + The ARP monitor operates as its name suggests: it sends ARP +queries to one or more designated peer systems on the network, and +uses the response as an indication that the link is operating. This +gives some assurance that traffic is actually flowing to and from one +or more peers on the local network. + + The ARP monitor relies on the device driver itself to verify +that traffic is flowing. In particular, the driver must keep up to +date the last receive time, dev->last_rx, and transmit start time, +dev->trans_start. If these are not updated by the driver, then the +ARP monitor will immediately fail any slaves using that driver, and +those slaves will stay down. If networking monitoring (tcpdump, etc) +shows the ARP requests and replies on the network, then it may be that +your device driver is not updating last_rx and trans_start. + +8.2 Configuring Multiple ARP Targets +------------------------------------ + + While ARP monitoring can be done with just one target, it can +be useful in a High Availability setup to have several targets to +monitor. In the case of just one target, the target itself may go +down or have a problem making it unresponsive to ARP requests. Having +an additional target (or several) increases the reliability of the ARP +monitoring. + + Multiple ARP targets must be seperated by commas as follows: + +# example options for ARP monitoring with three targets +alias bond0 bonding +options bond0 arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=192.168.0.1,192.168.0.3,192.168.0.9 + + For just a single target the options would resemble: + +# example options for ARP monitoring with one target +alias bond0 bonding +options bond0 arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=192.168.0.100 + + +8.3 MII Monitor Operation +------------------------- + + The MII monitor monitors only the carrier state of the local +network interface. It accomplishes this in one of three ways: by +depending upon the device driver to maintain its carrier state, by +querying the device's MII registers, or by making an ethtool query to +the device. + + If the use_carrier module parameter is 1 (the default value), +then the MII monitor will rely on the driver for carrier state +information (via the netif_carrier subsystem). As explained in the +use_carrier parameter information, above, if the MII monitor fails to +detect carrier loss on the device (e.g., when the cable is physically +disconnected), it may be that the driver does not support +netif_carrier. + + If use_carrier is 0, then the MII monitor will first query the +device's (via ioctl) MII registers and check the link state. If that +request fails (not just that it returns carrier down), then the MII +monitor will make an ethtool ETHOOL_GLINK request to attempt to obtain +the same information. If both methods fail (i.e., the driver either +does not support or had some error in processing both the MII register +and ethtool requests), then the MII monitor will assume the link is +up. + +9. Potential Sources of Trouble +=============================== + +9.1 Adventures in Routing +------------------------- + + When bonding is configured, it is important that the slave +devices not have routes that supercede routes of the master (or, +generally, not have routes at all). For example, suppose the bonding +device bond0 has two slaves, eth0 and eth1, and the routing table is +as follows: + +Kernel IP routing table +Destination Gateway Genmask Flags MSS Window irtt Iface +10.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 U 40 0 0 eth0 +10.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 U 40 0 0 eth1 +10.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 U 40 0 0 bond0 +127.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 U 40 0 0 lo + + This routing configuration will likely still update the +receive/transmit times in the driver (needed by the ARP monitor), but +may bypass the bonding driver (because outgoing traffic to, in this +case, another host on network 10 would use eth0 or eth1 before bond0). + + The ARP monitor (and ARP itself) may become confused by this +configuration, because ARP requests (generated by the ARP monitor) +will be sent on one interface (bond0), but the corresponding reply +will arrive on a different interface (eth0). This reply looks to ARP +as an unsolicited ARP reply (because ARP matches replies on an +interface basis), and is discarded. The MII monitor is not affected +by the state of the routing table. + + The solution here is simply to insure that slaves do not have +routes of their own, and if for some reason they must, those routes do +not supercede routes of their master. This should generally be the +case, but unusual configurations or errant manual or automatic static +route additions may cause trouble. + +9.2 Ethernet Device Renaming +---------------------------- + + On systems with network configuration scripts that do not +associate physical devices directly with network interface names (so +that the same physical device always has the same "ethX" name), it may +be necessary to add some special logic to either /etc/modules.conf or +/etc/modprobe.conf (depending upon which is installed on the system). + + For example, given a modules.conf containing the following: + +alias bond0 bonding +options bond0 mode=some-mode miimon=50 +alias eth0 tg3 +alias eth1 tg3 +alias eth2 e1000 +alias eth3 e1000 + + If neither eth0 and eth1 are slaves to bond0, then when the +bond0 interface comes up, the devices may end up reordered. This +happens because bonding is loaded first, then its slave device's +drivers are loaded next. Since no other drivers have been loaded, +when the e1000 driver loads, it will receive eth0 and eth1 for its +devices, but the bonding configuration tries to enslave eth2 and eth3 +(which may later be assigned to the tg3 devices). + + Adding the following: + +add above bonding e1000 tg3 + + causes modprobe to load e1000 then tg3, in that order, when +bonding is loaded. This command is fully documented in the +modules.conf manual page. + + On systems utilizing modprobe.conf (or modprobe.conf.local), +an equivalent problem can occur. In this case, the following can be +added to modprobe.conf (or modprobe.conf.local, as appropriate), as +follows (all on one line; it has been split here for clarity): + +install bonding /sbin/modprobe tg3; /sbin/modprobe e1000; + /sbin/modprobe --ignore-install bonding + + This will, when loading the bonding module, rather than +performing the normal action, instead execute the provided command. +This command loads the device drivers in the order needed, then calls +modprobe with --ingore-install to cause the normal action to then take +place. Full documentation on this can be found in the modprobe.conf +and modprobe manual pages. + +9.3. Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon +--------------------------------------------------------- + + By default, bonding enables the use_carrier option, which +instructs bonding to trust the driver to maintain carrier state. + + As discussed in the options section, above, some drivers do +not support the netif_carrier_on/_off link state tracking system. +With use_carrier enabled, bonding will always see these links as up, +regardless of their actual state. + + Additionally, other drivers do support netif_carrier, but do +not maintain it in real time, e.g., only polling the link state at +some fixed interval. In this case, miimon will detect failures, but +only after some long period of time has expired. If it appears that +miimon is very slow in detecting link failures, try specifying +use_carrier=0 to see if that improves the failure detection time. If +it does, then it may be that the driver checks the carrier state at a +fixed interval, but does not cache the MII register values (so the +use_carrier=0 method of querying the registers directly works). If +use_carrier=0 does not improve the failover, then the driver may cache +the registers, or the problem may be elsewhere. + + Also, remember that miimon only checks for the device's +carrier state. It has no way to determine the state of devices on or +beyond other ports of a switch, or if a switch is refusing to pass +traffic while still maintaining carrier on. + +10. SNMP agents +=============== + + If running SNMP agents, the bonding driver should be loaded +before any network drivers participating in a bond. This requirement +is due to the the interface index (ipAdEntIfIndex) being associated to +the first interface found with a given IP address. That is, there is +only one ipAdEntIfIndex for each IP address. For example, if eth0 and +eth1 are slaves of bond0 and the driver for eth0 is loaded before the +bonding driver, the interface for the IP address will be associated +with the eth0 interface. This configuration is shown below, the IP +address 192.168.1.1 has an interface index of 2 which indexes to eth0 +in the ifDescr table (ifDescr.2). + + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.1 = lo + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.2 = eth0 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.3 = eth1 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.4 = eth2 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.5 = eth3 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.6 = bond0 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.10.10.10.10 = 5 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.192.168.1.1 = 2 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.10.74.20.94 = 4 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.127.0.0.1 = 1 + + This problem is avoided by loading the bonding driver before +any network drivers participating in a bond. Below is an example of +loading the bonding driver first, the IP address 192.168.1.1 is +correctly associated with ifDescr.2. + + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.1 = lo + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.2 = bond0 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.3 = eth0 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.4 = eth1 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.5 = eth2 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.6 = eth3 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.10.10.10.10 = 6 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.192.168.1.1 = 2 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.10.74.20.94 = 5 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.127.0.0.1 = 1 + + While some distributions may not report the interface name in +ifDescr, the association between the IP address and IfIndex remains +and SNMP functions such as Interface_Scan_Next will report that +association. + +11. Promiscuous mode +==================== + + When running network monitoring tools, e.g., tcpdump, it is +common to enable promiscuous mode on the device, so that all traffic +is seen (instead of seeing only traffic destined for the local host). +The bonding driver handles promiscuous mode changes to the bonding +master device (e.g., bond0), and propogates the setting to the slave +devices. + + For the balance-rr, balance-xor, broadcast, and 802.3ad modes, +the promiscuous mode setting is propogated to all slaves. + + For the active-backup, balance-tlb and balance-alb modes, the +promiscuous mode setting is propogated only to the active slave. + + For balance-tlb mode, the active slave is the slave currently +receiving inbound traffic. + + For balance-alb mode, the active slave is the slave used as a +"primary." This slave is used for mode-specific control traffic, for +sending to peers that are unassigned or if the load is unbalanced. + + For the active-backup, balance-tlb and balance-alb modes, when +the active slave changes (e.g., due to a link failure), the +promiscuous setting will be propogated to the new active slave. + +12. High Availability Information +================================= + + High Availability refers to configurations that provide +maximum network availability by having redundant or backup devices, +links and switches between the host and the rest of the world. + + There are currently two basic methods for configuring to +maximize availability. They are dependent on the network topology and +the primary goal of the configuration, but in general, a configuration +can be optimized for maximum available bandwidth, or for maximum +network availability. + +12.1 High Availability in a Single Switch Topology +-------------------------------------------------- + + If two hosts (or a host and a switch) are directly connected +via multiple physical links, then there is no network availability +penalty for optimizing for maximum bandwidth: there is only one switch +(or peer), so if it fails, you have no alternative access to fail over +to. + +Example 1 : host to switch (or other host) + + +----------+ +----------+ + | |eth0 eth0| switch | + | Host A +--------------------------+ or | + | +--------------------------+ other | + | |eth1 eth1| host | + +----------+ +----------+ + + +12.1.1 Bonding Mode Selection for single switch topology +-------------------------------------------------------- + + This configuration is the easiest to set up and to understand, +although you will have to decide which bonding mode best suits your +needs. The tradeoffs for each mode are detailed below: + +balance-rr: This mode is the only mode that will permit a single + TCP/IP connection to stripe traffic across multiple + interfaces. It is therefore the only mode that will allow a + single TCP/IP stream to utilize more than one interface's + worth of throughput. This comes at a cost, however: the + striping often results in peer systems receiving packets out + of order, causing TCP/IP's congestion control system to kick + in, often by retransmitting segments. + + It is possible to adjust TCP/IP's congestion limits by + altering the net.ipv4.tcp_reordering sysctl parameter. The + usual default value is 3, and the maximum useful value is 127. + For a four interface balance-rr bond, expect that a single + TCP/IP stream will utilize no more than approximately 2.3 + interface's worth of throughput, even after adjusting + tcp_reordering. + + If you are utilizing protocols other than TCP/IP, UDP for + example, and your application can tolerate out of order + delivery, then this mode can allow for single stream datagram + performance that scales near linearly as interfaces are added + to the bond. + + This mode requires the switch to have the appropriate ports + configured for "etherchannel" or "trunking." + +active-backup: There is not much advantage in this network topology to + the active-backup mode, as the inactive backup devices are all + connected to the same peer as the primary. In this case, a + load balancing mode (with link monitoring) will provide the + same level of network availability, but with increased + available bandwidth. On the plus side, it does not require + any configuration of the switch. + +balance-xor: This mode will limit traffic such that packets destined + for specific peers will always be sent over the same + interface. Since the destination is determined by the MAC + addresses involved, this may be desirable if you have a large + network with many hosts. It is likely to be suboptimal if all + your traffic is passed through a single router, however. As + with balance-rr, the switch ports need to be configured for + "etherchannel" or "trunking." + +broadcast: Like active-backup, there is not much advantage to this + mode in this type of network topology. + +802.3ad: This mode can be a good choice for this type of network + topology. The 802.3ad mode is an IEEE standard, so all peers + that implement 802.3ad should interoperate well. The 802.3ad + protocol includes automatic configuration of the aggregates, + so minimal manual configuration of the switch is needed + (typically only to designate that some set of devices is + usable for 802.3ad). The 802.3ad standard also mandates that + frames be delivered in order (within certain limits), so in + general single connections will not see misordering of + packets. The 802.3ad mode does have some drawbacks: the + standard mandates that all devices in the aggregate operate at + the same speed and duplex. Also, as with all bonding load + balance modes other than balance-rr, no single connection will + be able to utilize more than a single interface's worth of + bandwidth. Additionally, the linux bonding 802.3ad + implementation distributes traffic by peer (using an XOR of + MAC addresses), so in general all traffic to a particular + destination will use the same interface. Finally, the 802.3ad + mode mandates the use of the MII monitor, therefore, the ARP + monitor is not available in this mode. + +balance-tlb: This mode is also a good choice for this type of + topology. It has no special switch configuration + requirements, and balances outgoing traffic by peer, in a + vaguely intelligent manner (not a simple XOR as in balance-xor + or 802.3ad mode), so that unlucky MAC addresses will not all + "bunch up" on a single interface. Interfaces may be of + differing speeds. On the down side, in this mode all incoming + traffic arrives over a single interface, this mode requires + certain ethtool support in the network device driver of the + slave interfaces, and the ARP monitor is not available. + +balance-alb: This mode is everything that balance-tlb is, and more. It + has all of the features (and restrictions) of balance-tlb, and + will also balance incoming traffic from peers (as described in + the Bonding Module Options section, above). The only extra + down side to this mode is that the network device driver must + support changing the hardware address while the device is + open. + +12.1.2 Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology +------------------------------------------------- + + The choice of link monitoring may largely depend upon which +mode you choose to use. The more advanced load balancing modes do not +support the use of the ARP monitor, and are thus restricted to using +the MII monitor (which does not provide as high a level of assurance +as the ARP monitor). + + +12.2 High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology +---------------------------------------------------- + + With multiple switches, the configuration of bonding and the +network changes dramatically. In multiple switch topologies, there is +a tradeoff between network availability and usable bandwidth. + + Below is a sample network, configured to maximize the +availability of the network: + + | | + |port3 port3| + +-----+----+ +-----+----+ + | |port2 ISL port2| | + | switch A +--------------------------+ switch B | + | | | | + +-----+----+ +-----++---+ + |port1 port1| + | +-------+ | + +-------------+ host1 +---------------+ + eth0 +-------+ eth1 + + In this configuration, there is a link between the two +switches (ISL, or inter switch link), and multiple ports connecting to +the outside world ("port3" on each switch). There is no technical +reason that this could not be extended to a third switch. + +12.2.1 Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology +---------------------------------------------------------- + + In a topology such as this, the active-backup and broadcast +modes are the only useful bonding modes; the other modes require all +links to terminate on the same peer for them to behave rationally. + +active-backup: This is generally the preferred mode, particularly if + the switches have an ISL and play together well. If the + network configuration is such that one switch is specifically + a backup switch (e.g., has lower capacity, higher cost, etc), + then the primary option can be used to insure that the + preferred link is always used when it is available. + +broadcast: This mode is really a special purpose mode, and is suitable + only for very specific needs. For example, if the two + switches are not connected (no ISL), and the networks beyond + them are totally independant. In this case, if it is + necessary for some specific one-way traffic to reach both + independent networks, then the broadcast mode may be suitable. + +12.2.2 Link Monitoring Selection for Multiple Switch Topology +------------------------------------------------------------- + + The choice of link monitoring ultimately depends upon your +switch. If the switch can reliably fail ports in response to other +failures, then either the MII or ARP monitors should work. For +example, in the above example, if the "port3" link fails at the remote +end, the MII monitor has no direct means to detect this. The ARP +monitor could be configured with a target at the remote end of port3, +thus detecting that failure without switch support. + + In general, however, in a multiple switch topology, the ARP +monitor can provide a higher level of reliability in detecting link +failures. Additionally, it should be configured with multiple targets +(at least one for each switch in the network). This will insure that, +regardless of which switch is active, the ARP monitor has a suitable +target to query. + + +12.3 Switch Behavior Issues for High Availability +------------------------------------------------- + + You may encounter issues with the timing of link up and down +reporting by the switch. + + First, when a link comes up, some switches may indicate that +the link is up (carrier available), but not pass traffic over the +interface for some period of time. This delay is typically due to +some type of autonegotiation or routing protocol, but may also occur +during switch initialization (e.g., during recovery after a switch +failure). If you find this to be a problem, specify an appropriate +value to the updelay bonding module option to delay the use of the +relevant interface(s). + + Second, some switches may "bounce" the link state one or more +times while a link is changing state. This occurs most commonly while +the switch is initializing. Again, an appropriate updelay value may +help, but note that if all links are down, then updelay is ignored +when any link becomes active (the slave closest to completing its +updelay is chosen). + + Note that when a bonding interface has no active links, the +driver will immediately reuse the first link that goes up, even if +updelay parameter was specified. If there are slave interfaces +waiting for the updelay timeout to expire, the interface that first +went into that state will be immediately reused. This reduces down +time of the network if the value of updelay has been overestimated. + + In addition to the concerns about switch timings, if your +switches take a long time to go into backup mode, it may be desirable +to not activate a backup interface immediately after a link goes down. +Failover may be delayed via the downdelay bonding module option. + +13. Hardware Specific Considerations +==================================== + + This section contains additional information for configuring +bonding on specific hardware platforms, or for interfacing bonding +with particular switches or other devices. + +13.1 IBM BladeCenter +-------------------- + + This applies to the JS20 and similar systems. + + On the JS20 blades, the bonding driver supports only +balance-rr, active-backup, balance-tlb and balance-alb modes. This is +largely due to the network topology inside the BladeCenter, detailed +below. + +JS20 network adapter information +-------------------------------- + + All JS20s come with two Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet ports +integrated on the planar. In the BladeCenter chassis, the eth0 port +of all JS20 blades is hard wired to I/O Module #1; similarly, all eth1 +ports are wired to I/O Module #2. An add-on Broadcom daughter card +can be installed on a JS20 to provide two more Gigabit Ethernet ports. +These ports, eth2 and eth3, are wired to I/O Modules 3 and 4, +respectively. + + Each I/O Module may contain either a switch or a passthrough +module (which allows ports to be directly connected to an external +switch). Some bonding modes require a specific BladeCenter internal +network topology in order to function; these are detailed below. + + Additional BladeCenter-specific networking information can be +found in two IBM Redbooks (www.ibm.com/redbooks): + +"IBM eServer BladeCenter Networking Options" +"IBM eServer BladeCenter Layer 2-7 Network Switching" + +BladeCenter networking configuration +------------------------------------ + + Because a BladeCenter can be configured in a very large number +of ways, this discussion will be confined to describing basic +configurations. + + Normally, Ethernet Switch Modules (ESM) are used in I/O +modules 1 and 2. In this configuration, the eth0 and eth1 ports of a +JS20 will be connected to different internal switches (in the +respective I/O modules). + + An optical passthru module (OPM) connects the I/O module +directly to an external switch. By using OPMs in I/O module #1 and +#2, the eth0 and eth1 interfaces of a JS20 can be redirected to the +outside world and connected to a common external switch. + + Depending upon the mix of ESM and OPM modules, the network +will appear to bonding as either a single switch topology (all OPM +modules) or as a multiple switch topology (one or more ESM modules, +zero or more OPM modules). It is also possible to connect ESM modules +together, resulting in a configuration much like the example in "High +Availability in a multiple switch topology." + +Requirements for specifc modes +------------------------------ + + The balance-rr mode requires the use of OPM modules for +devices in the bond, all connected to an common external switch. That +switch must be configured for "etherchannel" or "trunking" on the +appropriate ports, as is usual for balance-rr. + + The balance-alb and balance-tlb modes will function with +either switch modules or passthrough modules (or a mix). The only +specific requirement for these modes is that all network interfaces +must be able to reach all destinations for traffic sent over the +bonding device (i.e., the network must converge at some point outside +the BladeCenter). + + The active-backup mode has no additional requirements. + +Link monitoring issues +---------------------- + + When an Ethernet Switch Module is in place, only the ARP +monitor will reliably detect link loss to an external switch. This is +nothing unusual, but examination of the BladeCenter cabinet would +suggest that the "external" network ports are the ethernet ports for +the system, when it fact there is a switch between these "external" +ports and the devices on the JS20 system itself. The MII monitor is +only able to detect link failures between the ESM and the JS20 system. + + When a passthrough module is in place, the MII monitor does +detect failures to the "external" port, which is then directly +connected to the JS20 system. + +Other concerns +-------------- + + The Serial Over LAN link is established over the primary +ethernet (eth0) only, therefore, any loss of link to eth0 will result +in losing your SoL connection. It will not fail over with other +network traffic. + + It may be desirable to disable spanning tree on the switch +(either the internal Ethernet Switch Module, or an external switch) to +avoid fail-over delays issues when using bonding. + + +14. Frequently Asked Questions +============================== + +1. Is it SMP safe? + + Yes. The old 2.0.xx channel bonding patch was not SMP safe. +The new driver was designed to be SMP safe from the start. + +2. What type of cards will work with it? + + Any Ethernet type cards (you can even mix cards - a Intel +EtherExpress PRO/100 and a 3com 3c905b, for example). They need not +be of the same speed. + +3. How many bonding devices can I have? + + There is no limit. + +4. How many slaves can a bonding device have? + + This is limited only by the number of network interfaces Linux +supports and/or the number of network cards you can place in your +system. + +5. What happens when a slave link dies? + + If link monitoring is enabled, then the failing device will be +disabled. The active-backup mode will fail over to a backup link, and +other modes will ignore the failed link. The link will continue to be +monitored, and should it recover, it will rejoin the bond (in whatever +manner is appropriate for the mode). See the section on High +Availability for additional information. + + Link monitoring can be enabled via either the miimon or +arp_interval paramters (described in the module paramters section, +above). In general, miimon monitors the carrier state as sensed by +the underlying network device, and the arp monitor (arp_interval) +monitors connectivity to another host on the local network. + + If no link monitoring is configured, the bonding driver will +be unable to detect link failures, and will assume that all links are +always available. This will likely result in lost packets, and a +resulting degredation of performance. The precise performance loss +depends upon the bonding mode and network configuration. + +6. Can bonding be used for High Availability? + + Yes. See the section on High Availability for details. + +7. Which switches/systems does it work with? + + The full answer to this depends upon the desired mode. + + In the basic balance modes (balance-rr and balance-xor), it +works with any system that supports etherchannel (also called +trunking). Most managed switches currently available have such +support, and many unmananged switches as well. + + The advanced balance modes (balance-tlb and balance-alb) do +not have special switch requirements, but do need device drivers that +support specific features (described in the appropriate section under +module paramters, above). + + In 802.3ad mode, it works with with systems that support IEEE +802.3ad Dynamic Link Aggregation. Most managed and many unmanaged +switches currently available support 802.3ad. + + The active-backup mode should work with any Layer-II switch. + +8. Where does a bonding device get its MAC address from? + + If not explicitly configured with ifconfig, the MAC address of +the bonding device is taken from its first slave device. This MAC +address is then passed to all following slaves and remains persistent +(even if the the first slave is removed) until the bonding device is +brought down or reconfigured. + + If you wish to change the MAC address, you can set it with +ifconfig: + +# ifconfig bond0 hw ether 00:11:22:33:44:55 + + The MAC address can be also changed by bringing down/up the +device and then changing its slaves (or their order): + +# ifconfig bond0 down ; modprobe -r bonding +# ifconfig bond0 .... up +# ifenslave bond0 eth... + + This method will automatically take the address from the next +slave that is added. + + To restore your slaves' MAC addresses, you need to detach them +from the bond (`ifenslave -d bond0 eth0'). The bonding driver will +then restore the MAC addresses that the slaves had before they were +enslaved. + +15. Resources and Links +======================= + +The latest version of the bonding driver can be found in the latest +version of the linux kernel, found on http://kernel.org + +Discussions regarding the bonding driver take place primarily on the +bonding-devel mailing list, hosted at sourceforge.net. If you have +questions or problems, post them to the list. + +bonding-devel@lists.sourceforge.net + +https://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/bonding-devel + +There is also a project site on sourceforge. + +http://www.sourceforge.net/projects/bonding + +Donald Becker's Ethernet Drivers and diag programs may be found at : + - http://www.scyld.com/network/ + +You will also find a lot of information regarding Ethernet, NWay, MII, +etc. at www.scyld.com. + +-- END -- diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt b/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bdae2db4119c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +In order to use the Ethernet bridging functionality, you'll need the +userspace tools. These programs and documentation are available +at http://bridge.sourceforge.net. The download page is +http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/bridge. + +If you still have questions, don't hesitate to post to the mailing list +(more info http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bridge). + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/comx.txt b/Documentation/networking/comx.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d1526eba2645 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/comx.txt @@ -0,0 +1,248 @@ + + COMX drivers for the 2.2 kernel + +Originally written by: Tivadar Szemethy, +Currently maintained by: Gergely Madarasz + +Last change: 21/06/1999. + +INTRODUCTION + +This document describes the software drivers and their use for the +COMX line of synchronous serial adapters for Linux version 2.2.0 and +above. +The cards are produced and sold by ITC-Pro Ltd. Budapest, Hungary +For further info contact +or http://www.itc.hu (mostly in Hungarian). +The firmware files and software are available from ftp://ftp.itc.hu + +Currently, the drivers support the following cards and protocols: + +COMX (2x64 kbps intelligent board) +CMX (1x256 + 1x128 kbps intelligent board) +HiCOMX (2x2Mbps intelligent board) +LoCOMX (1x512 kbps passive board) +MixCOM (1x512 or 2x512kbps passive board with a hardware watchdog an + optional BRI interface and optional flashROM (1-32M)) +SliceCOM (1x2Mbps channelized E1 board) +PciCOM (X21) + +At the moment of writing this document, the (Cisco)-HDLC, LAPB, SyncPPP and +Frame Relay (DTE, rfc1294 IP encapsulation with partially implemented Q933a +LMI) protocols are available as link-level protocol. +X.25 support is being worked on. + +USAGE + +Load the comx.o module and the hardware-specific and protocol-specific +modules you'll need into the running kernel using the insmod utility. +This creates the /proc/comx directory. +See the example scripts in the 'etc' directory. + +/proc INTERFACE INTRO + +The COMX driver set has a new type of user interface based on the /proc +filesystem which eliminates the need for external user-land software doing +IOCTL calls. +Each network interface or device (i.e. those ones you configure with 'ifconfig' +and 'route' etc.) has a corresponding directory under /proc/comx. You can +dynamically create a new interface by saying 'mkdir /proc/comx/comx0' (or you +can name it whatever you want up to 8 characters long, comx[n] is just a +convention). +Generally the files contained in these directories are text files, which can +be viewed by 'cat filename' and you can write a string to such a file by +saying 'echo _string_ >filename'. This is very similar to the sysctl interface. +Don't use a text editor to edit these files, always use 'echo' (or 'cat' +where appropriate). +When you've created the comx[n] directory, two files are created automagically +in it: 'boardtype' and 'protocol'. You have to fill in these files correctly +for your board and protocol you intend to use (see the board and protocol +descriptions in this file below or the example scripts in the 'etc' directory). +After filling in these files, other files will appear in the directory for +setting the various hardware- and protocol-related informations (for example +irq and io addresses, keepalive values etc.) These files are set to default +values upon creation, so you don't necessarily have to change all of them. + +When you're ready with filling in the files in the comx[n] directory, you can +configure the corresponding network interface with the standard network +configuration utilities. If you're unable to bring the interfaces up, look up +the various kernel log files on your system, and consult the messages for +a probable reason. + +EXAMPLE + +To create the interface 'comx0' which is the first channel of a COMX card: + +insmod comx +# insmod comx-hw-comx ; insmod comx-proto-ppp (these are usually +autoloaded if you use the kernel module loader) + +mkdir /proc/comx/comx0 +echo comx >/proc/comx/comx0/boardtype +echo 0x360 >/proc/comx/comx0/io <- jumper-selectable I/O port +echo 0x0a >/proc/comx/comx0/irq <- jumper-selectable IRQ line +echo 0xd000 >/proc/comx/comx0/memaddr <- software-configurable memory + address. COMX uses 64 KB, and this + can be: 0xa000, 0xb000, 0xc000, + 0xd000, 0xe000. Avoid conflicts + with other hardware. +cat /proc/comx/comx0/firmware <- the firmware for the card +echo HDLC >/proc/comx/comx0/protocol <- the data-link protocol +echo 10 >/proc/comx/comx0/keepalive <- the keepalive for the protocol +ifconfig comx0 1.2.3.4 pointopoint 5.6.7.8 netmask 255.255.255.255 <- + finally configure it with ifconfig +Check its status: +cat /proc/comx/comx0/status + +If you want to use the second channel of this board: + +mkdir /proc/comx/comx1 +echo comx >/proc/comx/comx1/boardtype +echo 0x360 >/proc/comx/comx1/io +echo 10 >/proc/comx/comx1/irq +echo 0xd000 >/proc/comx/comx1/memaddr +echo 1 >/proc/comx/comx1/channel <- channels are numbered + as 0 (default) and 1 + +Now, check if the driver recognized that you're going to use the other +channel of the same adapter: + +cat /proc/comx/comx0/twin +comx1 +cat /proc/comx/comx1/twin +comx0 + +You don't have to load the firmware twice, if you use both channels of +an adapter, just write it into the channel 0's /proc firmware file. + +Default values: io 0x360 for COMX, 0x320 (HICOMX), irq 10, memaddr 0xd0000 + +THE LOCOMX HARDWARE DRIVER + +The LoCOMX driver doesn't require firmware, and it doesn't use memory either, +but it uses DMA channels 1 and 3. You can set the clock rate (if enabled by +jumpers on the board) by writing the kbps value into the file named 'clock'. +Set it to 'external' (it is the default) if you have external clock source. + +(Note: currently the LoCOMX driver does not support the internal clock) + +THE COMX, CMX AND HICOMX DRIVERS + +On the HICOMX, COMX and CMX, you have to load the firmware (it is different for +the three cards!). All these adapters can share the same memory +address (we usually use 0xd0000). On the CMX you can set the internal +clock rate (if enabled by jumpers on the small adapter boards) by writing +the kbps value into the 'clock' file. You have to do this before initializing +the card. If you use both HICOMX and CMX/COMX cards, initialize the HICOMX +first. The I/O address of the HICOMX board is not configurable by any +method available to the user: it is hardwired to 0x320, and if you have to +change it, consult ITC-Pro Ltd. + +THE MIXCOM DRIVER + +The MixCOM board doesn't require firmware, the driver communicates with +it through I/O ports. You can have three of these cards in one machine. + +THE SLICECOM DRIVER + +The SliceCOM board doesn't require firmware. You can have 4 of these cards +in one machine. The driver doesn't (yet) support shared interrupts, so +you will need a separate IRQ line for every board. +Read Documentation/networking/slicecom.txt for help on configuring +this adapter. + +THE HDLC/PPP LINE PROTOCOL DRIVER + +The HDLC/SyncPPP line protocol driver uses the kernel's built-in syncppp +driver (syncppp.o). You don't have to manually select syncppp.o when building +the kernel, the dependencies compile it in automatically. + + + + +EXAMPLE +(setting up hw parameters, see above) + +# using HDLC: +echo hdlc >/proc/comx/comx0/protocol +echo 10 >/proc/comx/comx0/keepalive <- not necessary, 10 is the default +ifconfig comx0 1.2.3.4 pointopoint 5.6.7.8 netmask 255.255.255.255 + +(setting up hw parameters, see above) + +# using PPP: +echo ppp >/proc/comx/comx0/protocol +ifconfig comx0 up +ifconfig comx0 1.2.3.4 pointopoint 5.6.7.8 netmask 255.255.255.255 + + +THE LAPB LINE PROTOCOL DRIVER + +For this, you'll need to configure LAPB support (See 'LAPB Data Link Driver' in +'Network options' section) into your kernel (thanks to Jonathan Naylor for his +excellent implementation). +comx-proto-lapb.o provides the following files in the appropriate directory +(the default values in parens): t1 (5), t2 (1), n2 (20), mode (DTE, STD) and +window (7). Agree with the administrator of your peer router on these +settings (most people use defaults, but you have to know if you are DTE or +DCE). + +EXAMPLE + +(setting up hw parameters, see above) +echo lapb >/proc/comx/comx0/protocol +echo dce >/proc/comx/comx0/mode <- DCE interface in this example +ifconfig comx0 1.2.3.4 pointopoint 5.6.7.8 netmask 255.255.255.255 + + +THE FRAME RELAY PROTOCOL DRIVER + +You DON'T need any other frame relay related modules from the kernel to use +COMX-Frame Relay. This protocol is a bit more complicated than the others, +because it allows to use 'subinterfaces' or DLCIs within one physical device. +First you have to create the 'master' device (the actual physical interface) +as you would do for other protocols. Specify 'frad' as protocol type. +Now you can bring this interface up by saying 'ifconfig comx0 up' (or whatever +you've named the interface). Do not assign any IP address to this interface +and do not set any routes through it. +Then, set up your DLCIs the following way: create a comx interface for each +DLCI you intend to use (with mkdir), and write 'dlci' to the 'boardtype' file, +and 'ietf-ip' to the 'protocol' file. Currently, the only supported +encapsulation type is this (also called as RFC1294/1490 IP encapsulation). +Write the DLCI number to the 'dlci' file, and write the name of the physical +COMX device to the file called 'master'. +Now you can assign an IP address to this interface and set routes using it. +See the example file for further info and example config script. +Notes: this driver implements a DTE interface with partially implemented +Q933a LMI. +You can find an extensively commented example in the 'etc' directory. + +FURTHER /proc FILES + +boardtype: +Type of the hardware. Valid values are: + 'comx', 'hicomx', 'locomx', 'cmx', 'slicecom'. + +protocol: +Data-link protocol on this channel. Can be: HDLC, LAPB, PPP, FRAD + +status: +You can read the channel's actual status from the 'status' file, for example +'cat /proc/comx/comx3/status'. + +lineup_delay: +Interpreted in seconds (default is 1). Used to avoid line jitter: the system +will consider the line status 'UP' only if it is up for at least this number +of seconds. + +debug: +You can set various debug options through this file. Valid options are: +'comx_events', 'comx_tx', 'comx_rx', 'hw_events', 'hw_tx', 'hw_rx'. +You can enable a debug options by writing its name prepended by a '+' into +the debug file, for example 'echo +comx_rx >comx0/debug'. +Disabling an option happens similarly, use the '-' prefix +(e.g. 'echo -hw_rx >debug'). +Debug results can be read from the debug file, for example: +tail -f /proc/comx/comx2/debug + + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cops.txt b/Documentation/networking/cops.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3e344b448e07 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/cops.txt @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +Text File for the COPS LocalTalk Linux driver (cops.c). + By Jay Schulist + +This driver has two modes and they are: Dayna mode and Tangent mode. +Each mode corresponds with the type of card. It has been found +that there are 2 main types of cards and all other cards are +the same and just have different names or only have minor differences +such as more IO ports. As this driver is tested it will +become more clear exactly what cards are supported. + +Right now these cards are known to work with the COPS driver. The +LT-200 cards work in a somewhat more limited capacity than the +DL200 cards, which work very well and are in use by many people. + +TANGENT driver mode: + Tangent ATB-II, Novell NL-1000, Daystar Digital LT-200 +DAYNA driver mode: + Dayna DL2000/DaynaTalk PC (Half Length), COPS LT-95, + Farallon PhoneNET PC III, Farallon PhoneNET PC II +Other cards possibly supported mode unknown though: + Dayna DL2000 (Full length) + +The COPS driver defaults to using Dayna mode. To change the driver's +mode if you built a driver with dual support use board_type=1 or +board_type=2 for Dayna or Tangent with insmod. + +** Operation/loading of the driver. +Use modprobe like this: /sbin/modprobe cops.o (IO #) (IRQ #) +If you do not specify any options the driver will try and use the IO = 0x240, +IRQ = 5. As of right now I would only use IRQ 5 for the card, if autoprobing. + +To load multiple COPS driver Localtalk cards you can do one of the following. + +insmod cops io=0x240 irq=5 +insmod -o cops2 cops io=0x260 irq=3 + +Or in lilo.conf put something like this: + append="ether=5,0x240,lt0 ether=3,0x260,lt1" + +Then bring up the interface with ifconfig. It will look something like this: +lt0 Link encap:UNSPEC HWaddr 00-00-00-00-00-00-00-F7-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00 + inet addr:192.168.1.2 Bcast:192.168.1.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 + UP BROADCAST RUNNING NOARP MULTICAST MTU:600 Metric:1 + RX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 + TX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 coll:0 + +** Netatalk Configuration +You will need to configure atalkd with something like the following to make +it work with the cops.c driver. + +* For single LTalk card use. +dummy -seed -phase 2 -net 2000 -addr 2000.10 -zone "1033" +lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.50 -zone "1033" + +* For multiple cards, Ethernet and LocalTalk. +eth0 -seed -phase 2 -net 3000 -addr 3000.20 -zone "1033" +lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.50 -zone "1033" + +* For multiple LocalTalk cards, and an Ethernet card. +* Order seems to matter here, Ethernet last. +lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.10 -zone "LocalTalk1" +lt1 -seed -phase 1 -net 2000 -addr 2000.20 -zone "LocalTalk2" +eth0 -seed -phase 2 -net 3000 -addr 3000.30 -zone "EtherTalk" diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt b/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..188beb7d6a17 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,703 @@ + +NOTE +---- + +This document was contributed by Cirrus Logic for kernel 2.2.5. This version +has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton + +Cirrus make a copy of this driver available at their website, as +described below. In general, you should use the driver version which +comes with your Linux distribution. + + + +CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS +Linux Network Interface Driver ver. 2.00 +=============================================================================== + + +TABLE OF CONTENTS + +1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS + 1.1 Product Overview + 1.2 Driver Description + 1.2.1 Driver Name + 1.2.2 File in the Driver Package + 1.3 System Requirements + 1.4 Licensing Information + +2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION + 2.1 CS8900-based Adapter Configuration + 2.2 CS8920-based Adapter Configuration + +3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE + +4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER + 4.1 Compiling the Driver as a Loadable Module + 4.2 Compiling the driver to support memory mode + 4.3 Compiling the driver to support Rx DMA + 4.4 Compiling the Driver into the Kernel + +5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING + 5.1 Known Defects and Limitations + 5.2 Testing the Adapter + 5.2.1 Diagnostic Self-Test + 5.2.2 Diagnostic Network Test + 5.3 Using the Adapter's LEDs + 5.4 Resolving I/O Conflicts + +6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT + 6.1 Contacting Cirrus Logic's Technical Support + 6.2 Information Required Before Contacting Technical Support + 6.3 Obtaining the Latest Driver Version + 6.4 Current maintainer + 6.5 Kernel boot parameters + + +1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS +=============================================================================== + + +1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW + +The CS8900-based ISA Ethernet Adapters from Cirrus Logic follow +IEEE 802.3 standards and support half or full-duplex operation in ISA bus +computers on 10 Mbps Ethernet networks. The adapters are designed for operation +in 16-bit ISA or EISA bus expansion slots and are available in +10BaseT-only or 3-media configurations (10BaseT, 10Base2, and AUI for 10Base-5 +or fiber networks). + +CS8920-based adapters are similar to the CS8900-based adapter with additional +features for Plug and Play (PnP) support and Wakeup Frame recognition. As +such, the configuration procedures differ somewhat between the two types of +adapters. Refer to the "Adapter Configuration" section for details on +configuring both types of adapters. + + +1.2 DRIVER DESCRIPTION + +The CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapter driver for Linux supports the Linux +v2.3.48 or greater kernel. It can be compiled directly into the kernel +or loaded at run-time as a device driver module. + +1.2.1 Driver Name: cs89x0 + +1.2.2 Files in the Driver Archive: + +The files in the driver at Cirrus' website include: + + readme.txt - this file + build - batch file to compile cs89x0.c. + cs89x0.c - driver C code + cs89x0.h - driver header file + cs89x0.o - pre-compiled module (for v2.2.5 kernel) + config/Config.in - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. + config/Makefile - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. + config/Space.c - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. + + + +1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS + +The following hardware is required: + + * Cirrus Logic LAN (CS8900/20-based) Ethernet ISA Adapter + + * IBM or IBM-compatible PC with: + * An 80386 or higher processor + * 16 bytes of contiguous IO space available between 210h - 370h + * One available IRQ (5,10,11,or 12 for the CS8900, 3-7,9-15 for CS8920). + + * Appropriate cable (and connector for AUI, 10BASE-2) for your network + topology. + +The following software is required: + +* LINUX kernel version 2.3.48 or higher + + * CS8900/20 Setup Utility (DOS-based) + + * LINUX kernel sources for your kernel (if compiling into kernel) + + * GNU Toolkit (gcc and make) v2.6 or above (if compiling into kernel + or a module) + + + +1.4 LICENSING INFORMATION + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software +Foundation, version 1. + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +more details. + +For a full copy of the GNU General Public License, write to the Free Software +Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + + + +2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION +=============================================================================== + +Both the CS8900 and CS8920-based adapters can be configured using parameters +stored in an on-board EEPROM. You must use the DOS-based CS8900/20 Setup +Utility if you want to change the adapter's configuration in EEPROM. + +When loading the driver as a module, you can specify many of the adapter's +configuration parameters on the command-line to override the EEPROM's settings +or for interface configuration when an EEPROM is not used. (CS8920-based +adapters must use an EEPROM.) See Section 3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE. + +Since the CS8900/20 Setup Utility is a DOS-based application, you must install +and configure the adapter in a DOS-based system using the CS8900/20 Setup +Utility before installation in the target LINUX system. (Not required if +installing a CS8900-based adapter and the default configuration is acceptable.) + + +2.1 CS8900-BASED ADAPTER CONFIGURATION + +CS8900-based adapters shipped from Cirrus Logic have been configured +with the following "default" settings: + + Operation Mode: Memory Mode + IRQ: 10 + Base I/O Address: 300 + Memory Base Address: D0000 + Optimization: DOS Client + Transmission Mode: Half-duplex + BootProm: None + Media Type: Autodetect (3-media cards) or + 10BASE-T (10BASE-T only adapter) + +You should only change the default configuration settings if conflicts with +another adapter exists. To change the adapter's configuration, run the +CS8900/20 Setup Utility. + + +2.2 CS8920-BASED ADAPTER CONFIGURATION + +CS8920-based adapters are shipped from Cirrus Logic configured as Plug +and Play (PnP) enabled. However, since the cs89x0 driver does NOT +support PnP, you must install the CS8920 adapter in a DOS-based PC and +run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility to disable PnP and configure the +adapter before installation in the target Linux system. Failure to do +this will leave the adapter inactive and the driver will be unable to +communicate with the adapter. + + + **************************************************************** + * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS: * + * * + * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS ARE PLUG and PLAY ENABLED BY DEFAULT. * + * THE CS89X0 DRIVER DOES NOT SUPPORT PnP. THEREFORE, YOU MUST * + * RUN THE CS8900/20 SETUP UTILITY TO DISABLE PnP SUPPORT AND * + * TO ACTIVATE THE ADAPTER. * + **************************************************************** + + + + +3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE +=============================================================================== + +If the driver is compiled as a loadable module, you can load the driver module +with the 'modprobe' command. Many of the adapter's configuration parameters can +be specified as command-line arguments to the load command. This facility +provides a means to override the EEPROM's settings or for interface +configuration when an EEPROM is not used. + +Example: + + insmod cs89x0.o io=0x200 irq=0xA media=aui + +This example loads the module and configures the adapter to use an IO port base +address of 200h, interrupt 10, and use the AUI media connection. The following +configuration options are available on the command line: + +* io=### - specify IO address (200h-360h) +* irq=## - specify interrupt level +* use_dma=1 - Enable DMA +* dma=# - specify dma channel (Driver is compiled to support + Rx DMA only) +* dmasize=# (16 or 64) - DMA size 16K or 64K. Default value is set to 16. +* media=rj45 - specify media type + or media=bnc + or media=aui + or medai=auto +* duplex=full - specify forced half/full/autonegotiate duplex + or duplex=half + or duplex=auto +* debug=# - debug level (only available if the driver was compiled + for debugging) + +NOTES: + +a) If an EEPROM is present, any specified command-line parameter + will override the corresponding configuration value stored in + EEPROM. + +b) The "io" parameter must be specified on the command-line. + +c) The driver's hardware probe routine is designed to avoid + writing to I/O space until it knows that there is a cs89x0 + card at the written addresses. This could cause problems + with device probing. To avoid this behaviour, add one + to the `io=' module parameter. This doesn't actually change + the I/O address, but it is a flag to tell the driver + topartially initialise the hardware before trying to + identify the card. This could be dangerous if you are + not sure that there is a cs89x0 card at the provided address. + + For example, to scan for an adapter located at IO base 0x300, + specify an IO address of 0x301. + +d) The "duplex=auto" parameter is only supported for the CS8920. + +e) The minimum command-line configuration required if an EEPROM is + not present is: + + io + irq + media type (no autodetect) + +f) The following additional parameters are CS89XX defaults (values + used with no EEPROM or command-line argument). + + * DMA Burst = enabled + * IOCHRDY Enabled = enabled + * UseSA = enabled + * CS8900 defaults to half-duplex if not specified on command-line + * CS8920 defaults to autoneg if not specified on command-line + * Use reset defaults for other config parameters + * dma_mode = 0 + +g) You can use ifconfig to set the adapter's Ethernet address. + +h) Many Linux distributions use the 'modprobe' command to load + modules. This program uses the '/etc/conf.modules' file to + determine configuration information which is passed to a driver + module when it is loaded. All the configuration options which are + described above may be placed within /etc/conf.modules. + + For example: + + > cat /etc/conf.modules + ... + alias eth0 cs89x0 + options cs89x0 io=0x0200 dma=5 use_dma=1 + ... + + In this example we are telling the module system that the + ethernet driver for this machine should use the cs89x0 driver. We + are asking 'modprobe' to pass the 'io', 'dma' and 'use_dma' + arguments to the driver when it is loaded. + +i) Cirrus recommend that the cs89x0 use the ISA DMA channels 5, 6 or + 7. You will probably find that other DMA channels will not work. + +j) The cs89x0 supports DMA for receiving only. DMA mode is + significantly more efficient. Flooding a 400 MHz Celeron machine + with large ping packets consumes 82% of its CPU capacity in non-DMA + mode. With DMA this is reduced to 45%. + +k) If your Linux kernel was compiled with inbuilt plug-and-play + support you will be able to find information about the cs89x0 card + with the command + + cat /proc/isapnp + +l) If during DMA operation you find erratic behavior or network data + corruption you should use your PC's BIOS to slow the EISA bus clock. + +m) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel + (non-modular) then its I/O address is automatically determined by + ISA bus probing. The IRQ number, media options, etc are determined + from the card's EEPROM. + +n) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel, DMA + mode may be selected by providing the kernel with a boot option + 'cs89x0_dma=N' where 'N' is the desired DMA channel number (5, 6 or 7). + + Kernel boot options may be provided on the LILO command line: + + LILO boot: linux cs89x0_dma=5 + + or they may be placed in /etc/lilo.conf: + + image=/boot/bzImage-2.3.48 + append="cs89x0_dma=5" + label=linux + root=/dev/hda5 + read-only + + The DMA Rx buffer size is hardwired to 16 kbytes in this mode. + (64k mode is not available). + + +4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER +=============================================================================== + +The cs89x0 driver can be compiled directly into the kernel or compiled into +a loadable device driver module. + + +4.1 COMPILING THE DRIVER AS A LOADABLE MODULE + +To compile the driver into a loadable module, use the following command +(single command line, without quotes): + +"gcc -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/include -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet -Wall +-Wstrict-prototypes -O2 -fomit-frame-pointer -DMODULE -DCONFIG_MODVERSIONS +-c cs89x0.c" + +4.2 COMPILING THE DRIVER TO SUPPORT MEMORY MODE + +Support for memory mode was not carried over into the 2.3 series kernels. + +4.3 COMPILING THE DRIVER TO SUPPORT Rx DMA + +The compile-time optionality for DMA was removed in the 2.3 kernel +series. DMA support is now unconditionally part of the driver. It is +enabled by the 'use_dma=1' module option. + +4.4 COMPILING THE DRIVER INTO THE KERNEL + +If your Linux distribution already has support for the cs89x0 driver +then simply copy the source file to the /usr/src/linux/drivers/net +directory to replace the original ones and run the make utility to +rebuild the kernel. See Step 3 for rebuilding the kernel. + +If your Linux does not include the cs89x0 driver, you need to edit three +configuration files, copy the source file to the /usr/src/linux/drivers/net +directory, and then run the make utility to rebuild the kernel. + +1. Edit the following configuration files by adding the statements as +indicated. (When possible, try to locate the added text to the section of the +file containing similar statements). + + +a.) In /usr/src/linux/drivers/net/Config.in, add: + +tristate 'CS89x0 support' CONFIG_CS89x0 + +Example: + + if [ "$CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL" = "y" ]; then + tristate 'ICL EtherTeam 16i/32 support' CONFIG_ETH16I + fi + + tristate 'CS89x0 support' CONFIG_CS89x0 + + tristate 'NE2000/NE1000 support' CONFIG_NE2000 + if [ "$CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL" = "y" ]; then + tristate 'NI5210 support' CONFIG_NI52 + + +b.) In /usr/src/linux/drivers/net/Makefile, add the following lines: + +ifeq ($(CONFIG_CS89x0),y) +L_OBJS += cs89x0.o +else + ifeq ($(CONFIG_CS89x0),m) + M_OBJS += cs89x0.o + endif +endif + + +c.) In /linux/drivers/net/Space.c file, add the line: + +extern int cs89x0_probe(struct device *dev); + + +Example: + + extern int ultra_probe(struct device *dev); + extern int wd_probe(struct device *dev); + extern int el2_probe(struct device *dev); + + extern int cs89x0_probe(struct device *dev); + + extern int ne_probe(struct device *dev); + extern int hp_probe(struct device *dev); + extern int hp_plus_probe(struct device *dev); + + +Also add: + + #ifdef CONFIG_CS89x0 + { cs89x0_probe,0 }, + #endif + + +2.) Copy the driver source files (cs89x0.c and cs89x0.h) +into the /usr/src/linux/drivers/net directory. + + +3.) Go to /usr/src/linux directory and run 'make config' followed by 'make' +(or make bzImage) to rebuild the kernel. + +4.) Use the DOS 'setup' utility to disable plug and play on the NIC. + + +5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING +=============================================================================== + +5.1 KNOWN DEFECTS and LIMITATIONS + +Refer to the RELEASE.TXT file distributed as part of this archive for a list of +known defects, driver limitations, and work arounds. + + +5.2 TESTING THE ADAPTER + +Once the adapter has been installed and configured, the diagnostic option of +the CS8900/20 Setup Utility can be used to test the functionality of the +adapter and its network connection. Use the diagnostics 'Self Test' option to +test the functionality of the adapter with the hardware configuration you have +assigned. You can use the diagnostics 'Network Test' to test the ability of the +adapter to communicate across the Ethernet with another PC equipped with a +CS8900/20-based adapter card (it must also be running the CS8900/20 Setup +Utility). + + NOTE: The Setup Utility's diagnostics are designed to run in a + DOS-only operating system environment. DO NOT run the diagnostics + from a DOS or command prompt session under Windows 95, Windows NT, + OS/2, or other operating system. + +To run the diagnostics tests on the CS8900/20 adapter: + + 1.) Boot DOS on the PC and start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility. + + 2.) The adapter's current configuration is displayed. Hit the ENTER key to + get to the main menu. + + 4.) Select 'Diagnostics' (ALT-G) from the main menu. + * Select 'Self-Test' to test the adapter's basic functionality. + * Select 'Network Test' to test the network connection and cabling. + + +5.2.1 DIAGNOSTIC SELF-TEST + +The diagnostic self-test checks the adapter's basic functionality as well as +its ability to communicate across the ISA bus based on the system resources +assigned during hardware configuration. The following tests are performed: + + * IO Register Read/Write Test + The IO Register Read/Write test insures that the CS8900/20 can be + accessed in IO mode, and that the IO base address is correct. + + * Shared Memory Test + The Shared Memory test insures the CS8900/20 can be accessed in memory + mode and that the range of memory addresses assigned does not conflict + with other devices in the system. + + * Interrupt Test + The Interrupt test insures there are no conflicts with the assigned IRQ + signal. + + * EEPROM Test + The EEPROM test insures the EEPROM can be read. + + * Chip RAM Test + The Chip RAM test insures the 4K of memory internal to the CS8900/20 is + working properly. + + * Internal Loop-back Test + The Internal Loop Back test insures the adapter's transmitter and + receiver are operating properly. If this test fails, make sure the + adapter's cable is connected to the network (check for LED activity for + example). + + * Boot PROM Test + The Boot PROM test insures the Boot PROM is present, and can be read. + Failure indicates the Boot PROM was not successfully read due to a + hardware problem or due to a conflicts on the Boot PROM address + assignment. (Test only applies if the adapter is configured to use the + Boot PROM option.) + +Failure of a test item indicates a possible system resource conflict with +another device on the ISA bus. In this case, you should use the Manual Setup +option to reconfigure the adapter by selecting a different value for the system +resource that failed. + + +5.2.2 DIAGNOSTIC NETWORK TEST + +The Diagnostic Network Test verifies a working network connection by +transferring data between two CS8900/20 adapters installed in different PCs +on the same network. (Note: the diagnostic network test should not be run +between two nodes across a router.) + +This test requires that each of the two PCs have a CS8900/20-based adapter +installed and have the CS8900/20 Setup Utility running. The first PC is +configured as a Responder and the other PC is configured as an Initiator. +Once the Initiator is started, it sends data frames to the Responder which +returns the frames to the Initiator. + +The total number of frames received and transmitted are displayed on the +Initiator's display, along with a count of the number of frames received and +transmitted OK or in error. The test can be terminated anytime by the user at +either PC. + +To setup the Diagnostic Network Test: + + 1.) Select a PC with a CS8900/20-based adapter and a known working network + connection to act as the Responder. Run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility + and select 'Diagnostics -> Network Test -> Responder' from the main + menu. Hit ENTER to start the Responder. + + 2.) Return to the PC with the CS8900/20-based adapter you want to test and + start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility. + + 3.) From the main menu, Select 'Diagnostic -> Network Test -> Initiator'. + Hit ENTER to start the test. + +You may stop the test on the Initiator at any time while allowing the Responder +to continue running. In this manner, you can move to additional PCs and test +them by starting the Initiator on another PC without having to stop/start the +Responder. + + + +5.3 USING THE ADAPTER'S LEDs + +The 2 and 3-media adapters have two LEDs visible on the back end of the board +located near the 10Base-T connector. + +Link Integrity LED: A "steady" ON of the green LED indicates a valid 10Base-T +connection. (Only applies to 10Base-T. The green LED has no significance for +a 10Base-2 or AUI connection.) + +TX/RX LED: The yellow LED lights briefly each time the adapter transmits or +receives data. (The yellow LED will appear to "flicker" on a typical network.) + + +5.4 RESOLVING I/O CONFLICTS + +An IO conflict occurs when two or more adapter use the same ISA resource (IO +address, memory address or IRQ). You can usually detect an IO conflict in one +of four ways after installing and or configuring the CS8900/20-based adapter: + + 1.) The system does not boot properly (or at all). + + 2.) The driver can not communicate with the adapter, reporting an "Adapter + not found" error message. + + 3.) You cannot connect to the network or the driver will not load. + + 4.) If you have configured the adapter to run in memory mode but the driver + reports it is using IO mode when loading, this is an indication of a + memory address conflict. + +If an IO conflict occurs, run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility and perform a +diagnostic self-test. Normally, the ISA resource in conflict will fail the +self-test. If so, reconfigure the adapter selecting another choice for the +resource in conflict. Run the diagnostics again to check for further IO +conflicts. + +In some cases, such as when the PC will not boot, it may be necessary to remove +the adapter and reconfigure it by installing it in another PC to run the +CS8900/20 Setup Utility. Once reinstalled in the target system, run the +diagnostics self-test to ensure the new configuration is free of conflicts +before loading the driver again. + +When manually configuring the adapter, keep in mind the typical ISA system +resource usage as indicated in the tables below. + +I/O Address Device IRQ Device +----------- -------- --- -------- + 200-20F Game I/O adapter 3 COM2, Bus Mouse + 230-23F Bus Mouse 4 COM1 + 270-27F LPT3: third parallel port 5 LPT2 + 2F0-2FF COM2: second serial port 6 Floppy Disk controller + 320-32F Fixed disk controller 7 LPT1 + 8 Real-time Clock + 9 EGA/VGA display adapter + 12 Mouse (PS/2) +Memory Address Device 13 Math Coprocessor +-------------- --------------------- 14 Hard Disk controller +A000-BFFF EGA Graphics Adpater +A000-C7FF VGA Graphics Adpater +B000-BFFF Mono Graphics Adapter +B800-BFFF Color Graphics Adapter +E000-FFFF AT BIOS + + + + +6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT +=============================================================================== + +6.1 CONTACTING CIRRUS LOGIC'S TECHNICAL SUPPORT + +Cirrus Logic's CS89XX Technical Application Support can be reached at: + +Telephone :(800) 888-5016 (from inside U.S. and Canada) + :(512) 442-7555 (from outside the U.S. and Canada) +Fax :(512) 912-3871 +Email :ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com +WWW :http://www.cirrus.com + + +6.2 INFORMATION REQUIRED BEFORE CONTACTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT + +Before contacting Cirrus Logic for technical support, be prepared to provide as +Much of the following information as possible. + +1.) Adapter type (CRD8900, CDB8900, CDB8920, etc.) + +2.) Adapter configuration + + * IO Base, Memory Base, IO or memory mode enabled, IRQ, DMA channel + * Plug and Play enabled/disabled (CS8920-based adapters only) + * Configured for media auto-detect or specific media type (which type). + +3.) PC System's Configuration + + * Plug and Play system (yes/no) + * BIOS (make and version) + * System make and model + * CPU (type and speed) + * System RAM + * SCSI Adapter + +4.) Software + + * CS89XX driver and version + * Your network operating system and version + * Your system's OS version + * Version of all protocol support files + +5.) Any Error Message displayed. + + + +6.3 OBTAINING THE LATEST DRIVER VERSION + +You can obtain the latest CS89XX drivers and support software from Cirrus Logic's +Web site. You can also contact Cirrus Logic's Technical Support (email: +ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com) and request that you be registered for automatic +software-update notification. + +Cirrus Logic maintains a web page at http://www.cirrus.com with the +the latest drivers and technical publications. + + +6.4 Current maintainer + +In February 2000 the maintenance of this driver was assumed by Andrew +Morton + +6.5 Kernel module parameters + +For use in embedded environments with no cs89x0 EEPROM, the kernel boot +parameter `cs89x0_media=' has been implemented. Usage is: + + cs89x0_media=rj45 or + cs89x0_media=aui or + cs89x0_media=bnc + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/de4x5.txt b/Documentation/networking/de4x5.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c8e4ca9b2c3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/de4x5.txt @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ + Originally, this driver was written for the Digital Equipment + Corporation series of EtherWORKS Ethernet cards: + + DE425 TP/COAX EISA + DE434 TP PCI + DE435 TP/COAX/AUI PCI + DE450 TP/COAX/AUI PCI + DE500 10/100 PCI Fasternet + + but it will now attempt to support all cards which conform to the + Digital Semiconductor SROM Specification. The driver currently + recognises the following chips: + + DC21040 (no SROM) + DC21041[A] + DC21140[A] + DC21142 + DC21143 + + So far the driver is known to work with the following cards: + + KINGSTON + Linksys + ZNYX342 + SMC8432 + SMC9332 (w/new SROM) + ZNYX31[45] + ZNYX346 10/100 4 port (can act as a 10/100 bridge!) + + The driver has been tested on a relatively busy network using the DE425, + DE434, DE435 and DE500 cards and benchmarked with 'ttcp': it transferred + 16M of data to a DECstation 5000/200 as follows: + + TCP UDP + TX RX TX RX + DE425 1030k 997k 1170k 1128k + DE434 1063k 995k 1170k 1125k + DE435 1063k 995k 1170k 1125k + DE500 1063k 998k 1170k 1125k in 10Mb/s mode + + All values are typical (in kBytes/sec) from a sample of 4 for each + measurement. Their error is +/-20k on a quiet (private) network and also + depend on what load the CPU has. + + ========================================================================= + + The ability to load this driver as a loadable module has been included + and used extensively during the driver development (to save those long + reboot sequences). Loadable module support under PCI and EISA has been + achieved by letting the driver autoprobe as if it were compiled into the + kernel. Do make sure you're not sharing interrupts with anything that + cannot accommodate interrupt sharing! + + To utilise this ability, you have to do 8 things: + + 0) have a copy of the loadable modules code installed on your system. + 1) copy de4x5.c from the /linux/drivers/net directory to your favourite + temporary directory. + 2) for fixed autoprobes (not recommended), edit the source code near + line 5594 to reflect the I/O address you're using, or assign these when + loading by: + + insmod de4x5 io=0xghh where g = bus number + hh = device number + + NB: autoprobing for modules is now supported by default. You may just + use: + + insmod de4x5 + + to load all available boards. For a specific board, still use + the 'io=?' above. + 3) compile de4x5.c, but include -DMODULE in the command line to ensure + that the correct bits are compiled (see end of source code). + 4) if you are wanting to add a new card, goto 5. Otherwise, recompile a + kernel with the de4x5 configuration turned off and reboot. + 5) insmod de4x5 [io=0xghh] + 6) run the net startup bits for your new eth?? interface(s) manually + (usually /etc/rc.inet[12] at boot time). + 7) enjoy! + + To unload a module, turn off the associated interface(s) + 'ifconfig eth?? down' then 'rmmod de4x5'. + + Automedia detection is included so that in principle you can disconnect + from, e.g. TP, reconnect to BNC and things will still work (after a + pause whilst the driver figures out where its media went). My tests + using ping showed that it appears to work.... + + By default, the driver will now autodetect any DECchip based card. + Should you have a need to restrict the driver to DIGITAL only cards, you + can compile with a DEC_ONLY define, or if loading as a module, use the + 'dec_only=1' parameter. + + I've changed the timing routines to use the kernel timer and scheduling + functions so that the hangs and other assorted problems that occurred + while autosensing the media should be gone. A bonus for the DC21040 + auto media sense algorithm is that it can now use one that is more in + line with the rest (the DC21040 chip doesn't have a hardware timer). + The downside is the 1 'jiffies' (10ms) resolution. + + IEEE 802.3u MII interface code has been added in anticipation that some + products may use it in the future. + + The SMC9332 card has a non-compliant SROM which needs fixing - I have + patched this driver to detect it because the SROM format used complies + to a previous DEC-STD format. + + I have removed the buffer copies needed for receive on Intels. I cannot + remove them for Alphas since the Tulip hardware only does longword + aligned DMA transfers and the Alphas get alignment traps with non + longword aligned data copies (which makes them really slow). No comment. + + I have added SROM decoding routines to make this driver work with any + card that supports the Digital Semiconductor SROM spec. This will help + all cards running the dc2114x series chips in particular. Cards using + the dc2104x chips should run correctly with the basic driver. I'm in + debt to for the testing and feedback that helped get + this feature working. So far we have tested KINGSTON, SMC8432, SMC9332 + (with the latest SROM complying with the SROM spec V3: their first was + broken), ZNYX342 and LinkSys. ZNYX314 (dual 21041 MAC) and ZNYX 315 + (quad 21041 MAC) cards also appear to work despite their incorrectly + wired IRQs. + + I have added a temporary fix for interrupt problems when some SCSI cards + share the same interrupt as the DECchip based cards. The problem occurs + because the SCSI card wants to grab the interrupt as a fast interrupt + (runs the service routine with interrupts turned off) vs. this card + which really needs to run the service routine with interrupts turned on. + This driver will now add the interrupt service routine as a fast + interrupt if it is bounced from the slow interrupt. THIS IS NOT A + RECOMMENDED WAY TO RUN THE DRIVER and has been done for a limited time + until people sort out their compatibility issues and the kernel + interrupt service code is fixed. YOU SHOULD SEPARATE OUT THE FAST + INTERRUPT CARDS FROM THE SLOW INTERRUPT CARDS to ensure that they do not + run on the same interrupt. PCMCIA/CardBus is another can of worms... + + Finally, I think I have really fixed the module loading problem with + more than one DECchip based card. As a side effect, I don't mess with + the device structure any more which means that if more than 1 card in + 2.0.x is installed (4 in 2.1.x), the user will have to edit + linux/drivers/net/Space.c to make room for them. Hence, module loading + is the preferred way to use this driver, since it doesn't have this + limitation. + + Where SROM media detection is used and full duplex is specified in the + SROM, the feature is ignored unless lp->params.fdx is set at compile + time OR during a module load (insmod de4x5 args='eth??:fdx' [see + below]). This is because there is no way to automatically detect full + duplex links except through autonegotiation. When I include the + autonegotiation feature in the SROM autoconf code, this detection will + occur automatically for that case. + + Command line arguments are now allowed, similar to passing arguments + through LILO. This will allow a per adapter board set up of full duplex + and media. The only lexical constraints are: the board name (dev->name) + appears in the list before its parameters. The list of parameters ends + either at the end of the parameter list or with another board name. The + following parameters are allowed: + + fdx for full duplex + autosense to set the media/speed; with the following + sub-parameters: + TP, TP_NW, BNC, AUI, BNC_AUI, 100Mb, 10Mb, AUTO + + Case sensitivity is important for the sub-parameters. They *must* be + upper case. Examples: + + insmod de4x5 args='eth1:fdx autosense=BNC eth0:autosense=100Mb'. + + For a compiled in driver, in linux/drivers/net/CONFIG, place e.g. + DE4X5_OPTS = -DDE4X5_PARM='"eth0:fdx autosense=AUI eth2:autosense=TP"' + + Yes, I know full duplex isn't permissible on BNC or AUI; they're just + examples. By default, full duplex is turned off and AUTO is the default + autosense setting. In reality, I expect only the full duplex option to + be used. Note the use of single quotes in the two examples above and the + lack of commas to separate items. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt b/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c6bd25f5d61d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,234 @@ + Linux DECnet Networking Layer Information + =========================================== + +1) Other documentation.... + + o Project Home Pages + http://www.chygwyn.com/DECnet/ - Kernel info + http://linux-decnet.sourceforge.net/ - Userland tools + http://www.sourceforge.net/projects/linux-decnet/ - Status page + +2) Configuring the kernel + +Be sure to turn on the following options: + + CONFIG_DECNET (obviously) + CONFIG_PROC_FS (to see what's going on) + CONFIG_SYSCTL (for easy configuration) + +if you want to try out router support (not properly debugged yet) +you'll need the following options as well... + + CONFIG_DECNET_ROUTER (to be able to add/delete routes) + CONFIG_NETFILTER (will be required for the DECnet routing daemon) + + CONFIG_DECNET_ROUTE_FWMARK is optional + +Don't turn on SIOCGIFCONF support for DECnet unless you are really sure +that you need it, in general you won't and it can cause ifconfig to +malfunction. + +Run time configuration has changed slightly from the 2.4 system. If you +want to configure an endnode, then the simplified procedure is as follows: + + o Set the MAC address on your ethernet card before starting _any_ other + network protocols. + +As soon as your network card is brought into the UP state, DECnet should +start working. If you need something more complicated or are unsure how +to set the MAC address, see the next section. Also all configurations which +worked with 2.4 will work under 2.5 with no change. + +3) Command line options + +You can set a DECnet address on the kernel command line for compatibility +with the 2.4 configuration procedure, but in general it's not needed any more. +If you do st a DECnet address on the command line, it has only one purpose +which is that its added to the addresses on the loopback device. + +With 2.4 kernels, DECnet would only recognise addresses as local if they +were added to the loopback device. In 2.5, any local interface address +can be used to loop back to the local machine. Of course this does not +prevent you adding further addresses to the loopback device if you +want to. + +N.B. Since the address list of an interface determines the addresses for +which "hello" messages are sent, if you don't set an address on the loopback +interface then you won't see any entries in /proc/net/neigh for the local +host until such time as you start a connection. This doesn't affect the +operation of the local communications in any other way though. + +The kernel command line takes options looking like the following: + + decnet=1,2 + +the two numbers are the node address 1,2 = 1.2 For 2.2.xx kernels +and early 2.3.xx kernels, you must use a comma when specifying the +DECnet address like this. For more recent 2.3.xx kernels, you may +use almost any character except space, although a `.` would be the most +obvious choice :-) + +There used to be a third number specifying the node type. This option +has gone away in favour of a per interface node type. This is now set +using /proc/sys/net/decnet/conf//forwarding. This file can be +set with a single digit, 0=EndNode, 1=L1 Router and 2=L2 Router. + +There are also equivalent options for modules. The node address can +also be set through the /proc/sys/net/decnet/ files, as can other system +parameters. + +Currently the only supported devices are ethernet and ip_gre. The +ethernet address of your ethernet card has to be set according to the DECnet +address of the node in order for it to be autoconfigured (and then appear in +/proc/net/decnet_dev). There is a utility available at the above +FTP sites called dn2ethaddr which can compute the correct ethernet +address to use. The address can be set by ifconfig either before at +at the time the device is brought up. If you are using RedHat you can +add the line: + + MACADDR=AA:00:04:00:03:04 + +or something similar, to /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth0 or +wherever your network card's configuration lives. Setting the MAC address +of your ethernet card to an address starting with "hi-ord" will cause a +DECnet address which matches to be added to the interface (which you can +verify with iproute2). + +The default device for routing can be set through the /proc filesystem +by setting /proc/sys/net/decnet/default_device to the +device you want DECnet to route packets out of when no specific route +is available. Usually this will be eth0, for example: + + echo -n "eth0" >/proc/sys/net/decnet/default_device + +If you don't set the default device, then it will default to the first +ethernet card which has been autoconfigured as described above. You can +confirm that by looking in the default_device file of course. + +There is a list of what the other files under /proc/sys/net/decnet/ do +on the kernel patch web site (shown above). + +4) Run time kernel configuration + +This is either done through the sysctl/proc interface (see the kernel web +pages for details on what the various options do) or through the iproute2 +package in the same way as IPv4/6 configuration is performed. + +Documentation for iproute2 is included with the package, although there is +as yet no specific section on DECnet, most of the features apply to both +IP and DECnet, albeit with DECnet addresses instead of IP addresses and +a reduced functionality. + +If you want to configure a DECnet router you'll need the iproute2 package +since its the _only_ way to add and delete routes currently. Eventually +there will be a routing daemon to send and receive routing messages for +each interface and update the kernel routing tables accordingly. The +routing daemon will use netfilter to listen to routing packets, and +rtnetlink to update the kernels routing tables. + +The DECnet raw socket layer has been removed since it was there purely +for use by the routing daemon which will now use netfilter (a much cleaner +and more generic solution) instead. + +5) How can I tell if its working ? + +Here is a quick guide of what to look for in order to know if your DECnet +kernel subsystem is working. + + - Is the node address set (see /proc/sys/net/decnet/node_address) + - Is the node of the correct type + (see /proc/sys/net/decnet/conf//forwarding) + - Is the Ethernet MAC address of each Ethernet card set to match + the DECnet address. If in doubt use the dn2ethaddr utility available + at the ftp archive. + - If the previous two steps are satisfied, and the Ethernet card is up, + you should find that it is listed in /proc/net/decnet_dev and also + that it appears as a directory in /proc/sys/net/decnet/conf/. The + loopback device (lo) should also appear and is required to communicate + within a node. + - If you have any DECnet routers on your network, they should appear + in /proc/net/decnet_neigh, otherwise this file will only contain the + entry for the node itself (if it doesn't check to see if lo is up). + - If you want to send to any node which is not listed in the + /proc/net/decnet_neigh file, you'll need to set the default device + to point to an Ethernet card with connection to a router. This is + again done with the /proc/sys/net/decnet/default_device file. + - Try starting a simple server and client, like the dnping/dnmirror + over the loopback interface. With luck they should communicate. + For this step and those after, you'll need the DECnet library + which can be obtained from the above ftp sites as well as the + actual utilities themselves. + - If this seems to work, then try talking to a node on your local + network, and see if you can obtain the same results. + - At this point you are on your own... :-) + +6) How to send a bug report + +If you've found a bug and want to report it, then there are several things +you can do to help me work out exactly what it is that is wrong. Useful +information (_most_ of which _is_ _essential_) includes: + + - What kernel version are you running ? + - What version of the patch are you running ? + - How far though the above set of tests can you get ? + - What is in the /proc/decnet* files and /proc/sys/net/decnet/* files ? + - Which services are you running ? + - Which client caused the problem ? + - How much data was being transferred ? + - Was the network congested ? + - If there was a kernel panic, please run the output through ksymoops + before sending it to me, otherwise its _useless_. + - How can the problem be reproduced ? + - Can you use tcpdump to get a trace ? (N.B. Most (all?) versions of + tcpdump don't understand how to dump DECnet properly, so including + the hex listing of the packet contents is _essential_, usually the -x flag. + You may also need to increase the length grabbed with the -s flag. The + -e flag also provides very useful information (ethernet MAC addresses)) + +7) MAC FAQ + +A quick FAQ on ethernet MAC addresses to explain how Linux and DECnet +interact and how to get the best performance from your hardware. + +Ethernet cards are designed to normally only pass received network frames +to a host computer when they are addressed to it, or to the broadcast address. + +Linux has an interface which allows the setting of extra addresses for +an ethernet card to listen to. If the ethernet card supports it, the +filtering operation will be done in hardware, if not the extra unwanted packets +received will be discarded by the host computer. In the latter case, +significant processor time and bus bandwidth can be used up on a busy +network (see the NAPI documentation for a longer explanation of these +effects). + +DECnet makes use of this interface to allow running DECnet on an ethernet +card which has already been configured using TCP/IP (presumably using the +built in MAC address of the card, as usual) and/or to allow multiple DECnet +addresses on each physical interface. If you do this, be aware that if your +ethernet card doesn't support perfect hashing in its MAC address filter +then your computer will be doing more work than required. Some cards +will simply set themselves into promiscuous mode in order to receive +packets from the DECnet specified addresses. So if you have one of these +cards its better to set the MAC address of the card as described above +to gain the best efficiency. Better still is to use a card which supports +NAPI as well. + + +8) Mailing list + +If you are keen to get involved in development, or want to ask questions +about configuration, or even just report bugs, then there is a mailing +list that you can join, details are at: + +http://sourceforge.net/mail/?group_id=4993 + +9) Legal Info + +The Linux DECnet project team have placed their code under the GPL. The +software is provided "as is" and without warranty express or implied. +DECnet is a trademark of Compaq. This software is not a product of +Compaq. We acknowledge the help of people at Compaq in providing extra +documentation above and beyond what was previously publicly available. + +Steve Whitehouse + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/depca.txt b/Documentation/networking/depca.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..24c6b26e5658 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/depca.txt @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + +DE10x +===== + +Memory Addresses: + + SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 +64K on on on on d0000 dbfff + off on on on c0000 cbfff + off off on on e0000 ebfff + +32K on on off on d8000 dbfff + off on off on c8000 cbfff + off off off on e8000 ebfff + +DBR ROM on on dc000 dffff + off on cc000 cffff + off off ec000 effff + +Note that the 2K mode is set by SW3/SW4 on/off or off/off. Address +assignment is through the RBSA register. + +I/O Address: + SW5 +0x300 on +0x200 off + +Remote Boot: + SW6 +Disable on +Enable off + +Remote Boot Timeout: + SW7 +2.5min on +30s off + +IRQ: + SW8 SW9 SW10 SW11 SW12 +2 on off off off off +3 off on off off off +4 off off on off off +5 off off off on off +7 off off off off on + +DE20x +===== + +Memory Size: + + SW3 SW4 +64K on on +32K off on +2K on off +2K off off + +Start Addresses: + + SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 +64K on on on on c0000 cffff + on off on on d0000 dffff + off on on on e0000 effff + +32K on on off off c8000 cffff + on off off off d8000 dffff + off on off off e8000 effff + +Illegal off off - - - - + +I/O Address: + SW5 +0x300 on +0x200 off + +Remote Boot: + SW6 +Disable on +Enable off + +Remote Boot Timeout: + SW7 +2.5min on +30s off + +IRQ: + SW8 SW9 SW10 SW11 SW12 +5 on off off off off +9 off on off off off +10 off off on off off +11 off off off on off +15 off off off off on + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dgrs.txt b/Documentation/networking/dgrs.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1aa1bb3f94ab --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/dgrs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + The Digi International RightSwitch SE-X (dgrs) Device Driver + +This is a Linux driver for the Digi International RightSwitch SE-X +EISA and PCI boards. These are 4 (EISA) or 6 (PCI) port Ethernet +switches and a NIC combined into a single board. This driver can +be compiled into the kernel statically or as a loadable module. + +There is also a companion management tool, called "xrightswitch". +The management tool lets you watch the performance graphically, +as well as set the SNMP agent IP and IPX addresses, IEEE Spanning +Tree, and Aging time. These can also be set from the command line +when the driver is loaded. The driver command line options are: + + debug=NNN Debug printing level + dma=0/1 Disable/Enable DMA on PCI card + spantree=0/1 Disable/Enable IEEE spanning tree + hashexpire=NNN Change address aging time (default 300 seconds) + ipaddr=A,B,C,D Set SNMP agent IP address i.e. 199,86,8,221 + iptrap=A,B,C,D Set SNMP agent IP trap address i.e. 199,86,8,221 + ipxnet=NNN Set SNMP agent IPX network number + nicmode=0/1 Disable/Enable multiple NIC mode + +There is also a tool for setting up input and output packet filters +on each port, called "dgrsfilt". + +Both the management tool and the filtering tool are available +separately from the following FTP site: + + ftp://ftp.dgii.com/drivers/rightswitch/linux/ + +When nicmode=1, the board and driver operate as 4 or 6 individual +NIC ports (eth0...eth5) instead of as a switch. All switching +functions are disabled. In the future, the board firmware may include +a routing cache when in this mode. + +Copyright 1995-1996 Digi International Inc. + +This software may be used and distributed according to the terms +of the GNU General Public License, incorporated herein by reference. + +For information on purchasing a RightSwitch SE-4 or SE-6 +board, please contact Digi's sales department at 1-612-912-3444 +or 1-800-DIGIBRD. Outside the U.S., please check our Web page at: + + http://www.dgii.com + +for sales offices worldwide. Tech support is also available through +the channels listed on the Web site, although as long as I am +employed on networking products at Digi I will be happy to provide +any bug fixes that may be needed. + +-Rick Richardson, rick@dgii.com diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt b/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d460492037ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt @@ -0,0 +1,281 @@ + + D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter Installation + for Linux + May 23, 2002 + +Contents +======== + - Compatibility List + - Quick Install + - Compiling the Driver + - Installing the Driver + - Option parameter + - Configuration Script Sample + - Troubleshooting + + +Compatibility List +================= +Adapter Support: + +D-Link DGE-550T Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. +D-Link DGE-550SX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. +D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. + + +The driver support Linux kernel 2.4.7 later. We had tested it +on the environments below. + + . Red Hat v6.2 (update kernel to 2.4.7) + . Red Hat v7.0 (update kernel to 2.4.7) + . Red Hat v7.1 (kernel 2.4.7) + . Red Hat v7.2 (kernel 2.4.7-10) + + +Quick Install +============= +Install linux driver as following command: + +1. make all +2. insmod dl2k.ko +3. ifconfig eth0 up 10.xxx.xxx.xxx netmask 255.0.0.0 + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^\ ^^^^^^^^\ + IP NETMASK +Now eth0 should active, you can test it by "ping" or get more information by +"ifconfig". If tested ok, continue the next step. + +4. cp dl2k.ko /lib/modules/`uname -r`/kernel/drivers/net +5. Add the following line to /etc/modprobe.conf: + alias eth0 dl2k +6. Run "netconfig" or "netconf" to create configuration script ifcfg-eth0 + located at /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts or create it manually. + [see - Configuration Script Sample] +7. Driver will automatically load and configure at next boot time. + +Compiling the Driver +==================== + In Linux, NIC drivers are most commonly configured as loadable modules. +The approach of building a monolithic kernel has become obsolete. The driver +can be compiled as part of a monolithic kernel, but is strongly discouraged. +The remainder of this section assumes the driver is built as a loadable module. +In the Linux environment, it is a good idea to rebuild the driver from the +source instead of relying on a precompiled version. This approach provides +better reliability since a precompiled driver might depend on libraries or +kernel features that are not present in a given Linux installation. + +The 3 files necessary to build Linux device driver are dl2k.c, dl2k.h and +Makefile. To compile, the Linux installation must include the gcc compiler, +the kernel source, and the kernel headers. The Linux driver supports Linux +Kernels 2.4.7. Copy the files to a directory and enter the following command +to compile and link the driver: + +CD-ROM drive +------------ + +[root@XXX /] mkdir cdrom +[root@XXX /] mount -r -t iso9660 -o conv=auto /dev/cdrom /cdrom +[root@XXX /] cd root +[root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k +[root@XXX /root] cd dl2k +[root@XXX dl2k] cp /cdrom/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k +[root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz +[root@XXX dl2k] make all + +Floppy disc drive +----------------- + +[root@XXX /] cd root +[root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k +[root@XXX /root] cd dl2k +[root@XXX dl2k] mcopy a:/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k +[root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz +[root@XXX dl2k] make all + +Installing the Driver +===================== + + Manual Installation + ------------------- + Once the driver has been compiled, it must be loaded, enabled, and bound + to a protocol stack in order to establish network connectivity. To load a + module enter the command: + + insmod dl2k.o + + or + + insmod dl2k.o ; add parameter + + =============================================================== + example: insmod dl2k.o media=100mbps_hd + or insmod dl2k.o media=3 + or insmod dl2k.o media=3,2 ; for 2 cards + =============================================================== + + Please reference the list of the command line parameters supported by + the Linux device driver below. + + The insmod command only loads the driver and gives it a name of the form + eth0, eth1, etc. To bring the NIC into an operational state, + it is necessary to issue the following command: + + ifconfig eth0 up + + Finally, to bind the driver to the active protocol (e.g., TCP/IP with + Linux), enter the following command: + + ifup eth0 + + Note that this is meaningful only if the system can find a configuration + script that contains the necessary network information. A sample will be + given in the next paragraph. + + The commands to unload a driver are as follows: + + ifdown eth0 + ifconfig eth0 down + rmmod dl2k.o + + The following are the commands to list the currently loaded modules and + to see the current network configuration. + + lsmod + ifconfig + + + Automated Installation + ---------------------- + This section describes how to install the driver such that it is + automatically loaded and configured at boot time. The following description + is based on a Red Hat 6.0/7.0 distribution, but it can easily be ported to + other distributions as well. + + Red Hat v6.x/v7.x + ----------------- + 1. Copy dl2k.o to the network modules directory, typically + /lib/modules/2.x.x-xx/net or /lib/modules/2.x.x/kernel/drivers/net. + 2. Locate the boot module configuration file, most commonly modprobe.conf + or modules.conf (for 2.4) in the /etc directory. Add the following lines: + + alias ethx dl2k + options dl2k + + where ethx will be eth0 if the NIC is the only ethernet adapter, eth1 if + one other ethernet adapter is installed, etc. Refer to the table in the + previous section for the list of optional parameters. + 3. Locate the network configuration scripts, normally the + /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts directory, and create a configuration + script named ifcfg-ethx that contains network information. + 4. Note that for most Linux distributions, Red Hat included, a configuration + utility with a graphical user interface is provided to perform steps 2 + and 3 above. + + +Parameter Description +===================== +You can install this driver without any addtional parameter. However, if you +are going to have extensive functions then it is necessary to set extra +parameter. Below is a list of the command line parameters supported by the +Linux device +driver. + +mtu=packet_size - Specifies the maximum packet size. default + is 1500. + +media=media_type - Specifies the media type the NIC operates at. + autosense Autosensing active media. + 10mbps_hd 10Mbps half duplex. + 10mbps_fd 10Mbps full duplex. + 100mbps_hd 100Mbps half duplex. + 100mbps_fd 100Mbps full duplex. + 1000mbps_fd 1000Mbps full duplex. + 1000mbps_hd 1000Mbps half duplex. + 0 Autosensing active media. + 1 10Mbps half duplex. + 2 10Mbps full duplex. + 3 100Mbps half duplex. + 4 100Mbps full duplex. + 5 1000Mbps half duplex. + 6 1000Mbps full duplex. + + By default, the NIC operates at autosense. + 1000mbps_fd and 1000mbps_hd types are only + available for fiber adapter. + +vlan=n - Specifies the VLAN ID. If vlan=0, the + Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) function is + disable. + +jumbo=[0|1] - Specifies the jumbo frame support. If jumbo=1, + the NIC accept jumbo frames. By default, this + function is disabled. + Jumbo frame usually improve the performance + int gigabit. + This feature need jumbo frame compatible + remote. + +rx_coalesce=m - Number of rx frame handled each interrupt. +rx_timeout=n - Rx DMA wait time for an interrupt. + If set rx_coalesce > 0, hardware only assert + an interrupt for m frames. Hardware won't + assert rx interrupt until m frames received or + reach timeout of n * 640 nano seconds. + Set proper rx_coalesce and rx_timeout can + reduce congestion collapse and overload which + has been a bottlenect for high speed network. + + For example, rx_coalesce=10 rx_timeout=800. + that is, hardware assert only 1 interrupt + for 10 frames received or timeout of 512 us. + +tx_coalesce=n - Number of tx frame handled each interrupt. + Set n > 1 can reduce the interrupts + congestion usually lower performance of + high speed network card. Default is 16. + +tx_flow=[1|0] - Specifies the Tx flow control. If tx_flow=0, + the Tx flow control disable else driver + autodetect. +rx_flow=[1|0] - Specifies the Rx flow control. If rx_flow=0, + the Rx flow control enable else driver + autodetect. + + +Configuration Script Sample +=========================== +Here is a sample of a simple configuration script: + +DEVICE=eth0 +USERCTL=no +ONBOOT=yes +POOTPROTO=none +BROADCAST=207.200.5.255 +NETWORK=207.200.5.0 +NETMASK=255.255.255.0 +IPADDR=207.200.5.2 + + +Troubleshooting +=============== +Q1. Source files contain ^ M behind every line. + Make sure all files are Unix file format (no LF). Try the following + shell command to convert files. + + cat dl2k.c | col -b > dl2k.tmp + mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c + + OR + + cat dl2k.c | tr -d "\r" > dl2k.tmp + mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c + +Q2: Could not find header files (*.h) ? + To compile the driver, you need kernel header files. After + installing the kernel source, the header files are usually located in + /usr/src/linux/include, which is the default include directory configured + in Makefile. For some distributions, there is a copy of header files in + /usr/src/include/linux and /usr/src/include/asm, that you can change the + INCLUDEDIR in Makefile to /usr/include without installing kernel source. + Note that RH 7.0 didn't provide correct header files in /usr/include, + including those files will make a wrong version driver. + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt b/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c0e8398674ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + dmfe.c: Version 1.28 01/18/2000 + + A Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux. + Copyright (C) 1997 Sten Wang + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or + modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License + as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 + of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + + A. Compiler command: + + A-1: For normal single or multiple processor kernel + "gcc -DMODULE -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet -Wall + -Wstrict-prototypes -O6 -c dmfe.c" + + A-2: For single or multiple processor with kernel module version function + "gcc -DMODULE -DMODVERSIONS -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet + -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes -O6 -c dmfe.c" + + + B. The following steps teach you how to activate a DM9102 board: + + 1. Used the upper compiler command to compile dmfe.c + + 2. Insert dmfe module into kernel + "insmod dmfe" ;;Auto Detection Mode (Suggest) + "insmod dmfe mode=0" ;;Force 10M Half Duplex + "insmod dmfe mode=1" ;;Force 100M Half Duplex + "insmod dmfe mode=4" ;;Force 10M Full Duplex + "insmod dmfe mode=5" ;;Force 100M Full Duplex + + 3. Config a dm9102 network interface + "ifconfig eth0 172.22.3.18" + ^^^^^^^^^^^ Your IP address + + 4. Activate the IP routing table. For some distributions, it is not + necessary. You can type "route" to check. + + "route add default eth0" + + + 5. Well done. Your DM9102 adapter is now activated. + + + C. Object files description: + 1. dmfe_rh61.o: For Redhat 6.1 + + If you can make sure your kernel version, you can rename + to dmfe.o and directly use it without re-compiling. + + + Author: Sten Wang, 886-3-5798797-8517, E-mail: sten_wang@davicom.com.tw diff --git a/Documentation/networking/driver.txt b/Documentation/networking/driver.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..11fd0ef5ff57 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/driver.txt @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +Documents about softnet driver issues in general can be found +at: + + http://www.firstfloor.org/~andi/softnet/ + +Transmit path guidelines: + +1) The hard_start_xmit method must never return '1' under any + normal circumstances. It is considered a hard error unless + there is no way your device can tell ahead of time when it's + transmit function will become busy. + + Instead it must maintain the queue properly. For example, + for a driver implementing scatter-gather this means: + + static int drv_hard_start_xmit(struct sk_buff *skb, + struct net_device *dev) + { + struct drv *dp = dev->priv; + + lock_tx(dp); + ... + /* This is a hard error log it. */ + if (TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) <= (skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags + 1)) { + netif_stop_queue(dev); + unlock_tx(dp); + printk(KERN_ERR PFX "%s: BUG! Tx Ring full when queue awake!\n", + dev->name); + return 1; + } + + ... queue packet to card ... + ... update tx consumer index ... + + if (TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) <= (MAX_SKB_FRAGS + 1)) + netif_stop_queue(dev); + + ... + unlock_tx(dp); + ... + } + + And then at the end of your TX reclaimation event handling: + + if (netif_queue_stopped(dp->dev) && + TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) > (MAX_SKB_FRAGS + 1)) + netif_wake_queue(dp->dev); + + For a non-scatter-gather supporting card, the three tests simply become: + + /* This is a hard error log it. */ + if (TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) <= 0) + + and: + + if (TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) == 0) + + and: + + if (netif_queue_stopped(dp->dev) && + TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) > 0) + netif_wake_queue(dp->dev); + +2) Do not forget to update netdev->trans_start to jiffies after + each new tx packet is given to the hardware. + +3) Do not forget that once you return 0 from your hard_start_xmit + method, it is your driver's responsibility to free up the SKB + and in some finite amount of time. + + For example, this means that it is not allowed for your TX + mitigation scheme to let TX packets "hang out" in the TX + ring unreclaimed forever if no new TX packets are sent. + This error can deadlock sockets waiting for send buffer room + to be freed up. + + If you return 1 from the hard_start_xmit method, you must not keep + any reference to that SKB and you must not attempt to free it up. + +Probing guidelines: + +1) Any hardware layer address you obtain for your device should + be verified. For example, for ethernet check it with + linux/etherdevice.h:is_valid_ether_addr() + +Close/stop guidelines: + +1) After the dev->stop routine has been called, the hardware must + not receive or transmit any data. All in flight packets must + be aborted. If necessary, poll or wait for completion of + any reset commands. + +2) The dev->stop routine will be called by unregister_netdevice + if device is still UP. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4ef9f7cd5dc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ +Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of Adapters +============================================================== + +November 17, 2004 + + +Contents +======== + +- In This Release +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Driver Configuration Parameters +- Additional Configurations +- Support + + +In This Release +=============== + +This file describes the Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of +Adapters, version 3.3.x. This driver supports 2.4.x and 2.6.x kernels. + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== + +For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & +Driver ID Guide at: + + http://support.intel.com/support/network/adapter/pro100/21397.htm + +For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, refer to the following +website. In the search field, enter your adapter name or type, or use the +networking link on the left to search for your adapter: + + http://downloadfinder.intel.com/scripts-df/support_intel.asp + +Driver Configuration Parameters +=============================== + +The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, +unless otherwise noted. + +Rx Descriptors: Number of receive descriptors. A receive descriptor is a data + structure that describes a receive buffer and its attributes to the network + controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to write + data from the controller to host memory. In the 3.0.x driver the valid + range for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 64. This parameter + can be changed using the command + + ethtool -G eth? rx n, where n is the number of desired rx descriptors. + +Tx Descriptors: Number of transmit descriptors. A transmit descriptor is a + data structure that describes a transmit buffer and its attributes to the + network controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to + read data from the host memory to the controller. In the 3.0.x driver the + valid range for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 64. This + parameter can be changed using the command + + ethtool -G eth? tx n, where n is the number of desired tx descriptors. + +Speed/Duplex: The driver auto-negotiates the link speed and duplex settings by + default. Ethtool can be used as follows to force speed/duplex. + + ethtool -s eth? autoneg off speed {10|100} duplex {full|half} + + NOTE: setting the speed/duplex to incorrect values will cause the link to + fail. + +Event Log Message Level: The driver uses the message level flag to log events + to syslog. The message level can be set at driver load time. It can also be + set using the command + + ethtool -s eth? msglvl n + +Additional Configurations +========================= + + Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions + ------------------------------------------------- + + Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started is + distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves adding + an alias line to /etc/modules.conf as well as editing other system startup + scripts and/or configuration files. Many popular Linux distributions ship + with tools to make these changes for you. To learn the proper way to + configure a network device for your system, refer to your distribution + documentation. If during this process you are asked for the driver or module + name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for the Intel PRO/100 Family of + Adapters is e100. + + As an example, if you install the e100 driver for two PRO/100 adapters + (eth0 and eth1), add the following to modules.conf: + + alias eth0 e100 + alias eth1 e100 + + Viewing Link Messages + --------------------- + In order to see link messages and other Intel driver information on your + console, you must set the dmesg level up to six. This can be done by + entering the following on the command line before loading the e100 driver: + + dmesg -n 8 + + If you wish to see all messages issued by the driver, including debug + messages, set the dmesg level to eight. + + NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. + + Ethtool + ------- + + The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool + version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. + + The latest release of ethtool can be found at: + http://sf.net/projects/gkernel. + + NOTE: This driver uses mii support from the kernel. As a result, when + there is no link, ethtool will report speed/duplex to be 10/half. + + NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support + for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading + ethtool to ethtool-1.8.1. + + Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) + --------------------------- + WoL is provided through the Ethtool* utility. Ethtool is included with Red + Hat* 8.0. For other Linux distributions, download and install Ethtool from + the following website: http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + + For instructions on enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man + page. + + WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For + this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e100 driver must be + loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system. + + NAPI + ---- + + NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the e100 driver. + + See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI. + +Support +======= + +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + + http://support.intel.com + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported +kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to +the issue to linux.nics@intel.com. + + +License +======= + +This software program is released under the terms of a license agreement +between you ('Licensee') and Intel. Do not use or load this software or any +associated materials (collectively, the 'Software') until you have carefully +read the full terms and conditions of the LICENSE located in this software +package. By loading or using the Software, you agree to the terms of this +Agreement. If you do not agree with the terms of this Agreement, do not +install or use the Software. + +* Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2ebd4058d46d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt @@ -0,0 +1,401 @@ +Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/1000 Family of Adapters +=============================================================== + +November 17, 2004 + + +Contents +======== + +- In This Release +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Command Line Parameters +- Speed and Duplex Configuration +- Additional Configurations +- Known Issues +- Support + + +In This Release +=============== + +This file describes the Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/1000 Family +of Adapters, version 5.x.x. + +For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation +supplied with your Intel PRO/1000 adapter. All hardware requirements listed +apply to use with Linux. + +Native VLANs are now available with supported kernels. + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== + +For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & +Driver ID Guide at: + + http://support.intel.com/support/network/adapter/pro100/21397.htm + +For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, refer to the following +website. In the search field, enter your adapter name or type, or use the +networking link on the left to search for your adapter: + + http://downloadfinder.intel.com/scripts-df/support_intel.asp + +Command Line Parameters +======================= + +If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are +used by entering them on the command line with the modprobe or insmod command +using this syntax: + + modprobe e1000 [